Mitsubishi GOT1000 Series Connection Manual
  1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. Mitsubishi Manuals
  4. Touch terminals
  5. GOT1000 Series
  6. Connection manual

Mitsubishi GOT1000 Series Connection Manual

Graphic operation terminal
Hide thumbs Also See for GOT1000 Series:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
797
798
799
800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840
841
842
843
844
845
846
847
848
849
850
851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
860
861
862
863
864
865
866
867
868
869
870
871
872
873
874
875
876
877
878
879
880
881
882
883
884
885
886
887
888
889
890
891
892
893
894
895
896
897
898
899
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
914
915
916
917
918
919
920
921
922
923
924
925
926
927
928
929
930
931
932
933
934
935
936
937
938
939
940
941
942
943
944
945
946
947
948
949
950
951
952
953
954
955
956
957
958
959
960
961
962
963
964
965
966
967
968
969
970
971
972
973
974
975
976
977
978
979
980
981
982
983
984
985
986
987
988
989
990
Table of Contents

Advertisement

Quick Links

See also: User Manual
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual
1/2

Advertisement

Table of Contents
loading

Related Manuals for Mitsubishi GOT1000 Series

Summary of Contents for Mitsubishi GOT1000 Series

  • Page 1 GOT1000 Series Connection Manual...

  • Page 3: Safety Precautions

    SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (Always read these precautions before using this equipment.) Before using this product, please read this manual and the relevant manuals introduced in this manual carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly. The precautions given in this manual are concerned with this product. In this manual, the safety precautions are ranked as "DANGER"...
  • Page 4 [DESIGN PRECAUTIONS] DANGER Incorrect operation of the touch switch(s) may lead to a serious accident if the GOT backlight is gone out. When the GOT backlight goes out, the POWER LED flickers (green/orange) and the display section turns black and causes the monitor screen to appear blank, while the input of the touch switch(s) remains active.
  • Page 5 [MOUNTING PRECAUTIONS] CAUTION When loading the communication unit to the GOT, fit it to the connection interface of the GOT and tighten the mounting screws in the specified torque range. Overtightening can cause a drop, failure or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit. When mounting the multi-color display board onto the GOT, tighten the mounting screws within the specified torque range.
  • Page 6 [WIRING PRECAUTIONS] CAUTION Please make sure to ground FG terminal and LG terminal of the GOT power supply section by applying Class D Grounding (Class 3 Grounding Method) or higher which is used exclusively for the GOT. Not doing so may cause an electric shock or malfunction. Be sure to tighten any unused terminal screws with a torque of 0.5 to 0.8N•m.
  • Page 7 [TEST OPERATION PRECAUTIONS] DANGER Before performing the test operations of the user creation monitor screen (such as turning ON or OFF bit device, changing the word device current value, changing the settings or current values of the timer or counter, and changing the buffer memory current value), read through the manual carefully and make yourself familiar with the operation method.
  • Page 8 [STARTUP/MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS] CAUTION Do not disassemble or modify the unit. Doing so can cause a failure, malfunction, injury or fire. Do not touch the conductive and electronic parts of the unit directly. Doing so can cause a unit malfunction or failure. The cables connected to the unit must be run in ducts or clamped.
  • Page 9 [DISPOSAL PRECAUTIONS] CAUTION When disposing of the product, handle it as industrial waste. [TRANSPORTATION PRECAUTIONS] CAUTION When transporting lithium batteries, make sure to treat them based on the transport regulations. (For details on models subject to restrictions, refer to the User's Manual for the GOT you are using.) Make sure to transport the GOT main unit and/or relevant unit(s) in the manner they will not be exposed to the impact exceeding the impact resistance described in the general specifications of the User's Manual, as they are precision devices.

  • Page 10: Revisions

    REVISIONS * The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover. This volume is SH(NA)-080532ENG-D 1/2. Print Date * Manual Number Revision Oct., 2004 SH(NA)-080532ENG-A First edition Mar., 2005 SH(NA)-080532ENG-B Compatible with GT Designer2 Version2.09K Addition Chapter 5, Chapter 6, Chapter 7, Chapter 8, Chapter 10, Chapter 11, Chapter 12, Chapter 13, Chapter 19, Chapter 20, Chapter 21, Chapter 22, Chapter 23,Section 3.1.8, Section 3.1.9...
  • Page 11 This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind, nor does it confer any patent licenses. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual.

  • Page 12: Table Of Contents

    INTRODUCTION Thank you for choosing Mitsubishi Graphic Operation Terminal (Mitsubishi GOT). Read this manual and make sure you understand the functions and performance of the GOT thoroughly in advance to ensure correct use. CONTENTS SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ..........................A - 1 REVISIONS...............................A - 8 INTRODUCTION.............................A - 10...
  • Page 13 3. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 3 - 1 to 3 - 36 System Configuration 3 - 2 3.1.1 Connecting to QCPU ......................3 - 3 3.1.2 Connecting to QnACPU or ACPU ..................3 - 5 3.1.3 Connecting to FXCPU (FX , FX , FX , FX...
  • Page 14 4.4.1 Connecting serial communication module (Q Series)............4 - 40 4.4.2 Connecting serial communication module (QnA Series) ............ 4 - 43 4.4.3 Connecting computer link module ..................4 - 46 5. MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 5 - 1 to 5 - 44 System Configuration 5 - 2 5.1.1...
  • Page 15 7.2.1 Installing OS onto GOT ......................7 - 6 7.2.2 Checking OS installation on GOT..................7 - 7 7.2.3 Setting communication interface (Communication settings)..........7 - 8 7.2.4 Downloading project data ....................7 - 10 7.2.5 Attaching communication unit and connecting cable............7 - 11 7.2.6 Verifying GOT recognizes connected equipment ...............
  • Page 16 PLC Side Setting 9 - 37 9.4.1 Connecting CPM2A, CQM1, CQM1H, C200H or RS-232C adapter ........9 - 38 9.4.2 Connecting CJ1 or CS1 ...................... 9 - 39 9.4.3 Connecting CV500/CV1000/CV2000 or CVM1 ..............9 - 42 9.4.4 Connecting connection cable....................9 - 44 9.4.5 Connecting rack type host link unit ..................
  • Page 17 11.3.3 Setting communication interface (Communication settings)..........11 - 24 11.3.4 Downloading project data ....................11 - 26 11.3.5 Attaching communication unit and connecting cable............11 - 27 11.3.6 Verifying GOT recognizes connected equipment ............. 11 - 31 11.3.7 Checking for normal monitoring..................11 - 33 11.4 PLC Side Setting 11 - 35...
  • Page 18 13.3.6 Verifying GOT recognizes connected equipment ............. 13 - 22 13.3.7 Checking for normal monitoring..................13 - 24 13.4 PLC Side Setting 13 - 26 13.5 List of Functions Added by Version Upgrade 13 - 28 14. CONNECTION TO MATSUSHITA PLC 14 - 1 to 14 - 38 14.1 System Configuration...
  • Page 19 15.4 PLC Side Setting 15 - 33 16. CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC 16 - 1 to 16 - 36 16.1 System Configuration 16 - 2 16.1.1 Connecting to FA-M3......................16 - 2 16.1.2 Connecting to FA500 ......................16 - 5 16.2 Connection Cable 16 - 7...
  • Page 20 18.3.1 Installing OS onto GOT....................... 18 - 8 18.3.2 Checking OS installation on GOT..................18 - 9 18.3.3 Setting communication interface (Communication settings)..........18 - 10 18.3.4 Downloading project data ....................18 - 13 18.3.5 Attaching communication unit and connecting cable............18 - 14 18.3.6 Verifying GOT recognizes connected equipment .............
  • Page 21 TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER CONNECTIONS 20. CONNECTION TO OMRON TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 20 - 1 to 20 - 34 20.1 System configuration 20 - 2 20.1.1 Connecting E5AN, E5EN....................20 - 2 20.1.2 Connecting to E5CN, E5GN ....................20 - 4 20.1.3 Connecting to E5ZN ......................20 - 6 20.2 Connection Cable 20 - 8...
  • Page 22 21.4.1 Connecting to DMC10 ...................... 21 - 38 21.4.2 Connecting SDC40A/40B/40G ..................21 - 39 21.4.3 Connecting SDC15, SDC25/26, SDC35/36..............21 - 39 21.4.4 Connecting SDC20/21, SDC30/31 .................. 21 - 40 21.4.5 Connecting CMC10L ......................21 - 40 21.4.6 Station NO. settings......................21 - 42 21.5 Precautions 21 - 43...
  • Page 23 23.3.5 Attaching communication unit and connecting cable............23 - 22 23.3.6 Verifying GOT recognizes connected equipment ............. 23 - 25 23.3.7 Checking for normal monitoring..................23 - 27 23.4 FREQROL Series Inverter Side Settings 23 - 29 23.5 Precautions 23 - 31 23.6 List of Functions Added by Version Upgrade 23 - 32...
  • Page 24 26. PRINTER CONNECTION 26 - 1 to 26 - 14 26.1 System Configuration 26 - 2 26.2 Preparatory Procedures for Monitoring 26 - 4 26.2.1 Installing OS onto GOT....................... 26 - 5 26.2.2 Checking OS installation on GOT..................26 - 6 26.2.3 Setting communication interface (Communication settings)..........
  • Page 25 27.3.10 CNC Side Settings......................27 - 58 27.3.11 Precautions........................27 - 61 27.4 Ethernet Connection 27 - 62 27.4.1 System Configuration ....................... 27 - 62 27.4.2 Preparatory Procedures for Monitoring ................27 - 64 27.4.3 Installing OS onto GOT ....................27 - 65 27.4.4 Checking OS installation on GOT..................
  • Page 26 29.5.1 Precautions common to each software................29 - 20 29.5.2 When using GX Developer ....................29 - 23 29.5.3 When using FR Configurator .................... 29 - 25 29.6 List of Functions Added by Version Upgrade 29 - 26 30. MULTIPLE-GT11 CONNECTION FUNCTION 30 - 1 to 30 - 20 30.1 System Configuration...

  • Page 27: About Manuals

    Describes specifications and settings of each object function applicable to GOT1000 series. (Sold separately)* GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (1/2, 2/2) SH-080532ENG Describes system configurations of the connection method applicable to GOT1000 series and cable creation (1D7M26) (Sold separately) GOT1000 Series Gateway Functions Manual SH-080545ENG Describes specifications, system comfigurations and setting method of the gateway function.

  • Page 28: Abbreviations And Generic Terms In This Manual

    Abbreviation of GT1575-VTBA, GT1575-VTBD GT157 GT1575-VN Abbreviation of GT1575-VNBA, GT1575-VNBD GT1572-VN Abbreviation of GT1572-VNBA, GT1572-VNBD GT1565-V Abbreviation of GT1565-VTBA, GT1565-VTBD GOT1000 Series GT156 GT1562-VN Abbreviation of GT1562-VNBA, GT1562-VNBD GT15 , GT15 Abbreviation of GT1595, GT1585, GT157 , GT156 GT1155-Q Abbreviation of GT1155-QSBD...
  • Page 29 Option Abbreviations and generic terms Description GT15-90XLTT, GT15-80SLTT, GT15-70SLTT, GT15-70VLTT, Backlight GT15-70VLTN, GT15-60VLTT, GT15-60VLTN GT15-FNB, GT15-QFNB, GT15-QFNB16M, GT15-QFNB32M, Option function board GT15-QFNB48M, GT11-50FNB Multi-color display board GT15-XHNB, GT15-VHNB Printer unit GT15-PRN GT15-90PSCB, GT15-90PSGB, GT15-90PSCW, GT15-90PSGW, GT15-80PSCB, GT15-80PSGB, GT15-80PSCW, GT15-80PSGW, GT15-70PSCB, GT15-70PSGB, GT15-70PSCW, GT15-70PSGW,...
  • Page 30 Others Abbreviations and generic terms Description Omron PLC Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by OMRON Corporation KEYENCE PLC Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by KEYENCE Sharp PLC Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by SHARP Corporation Toshiba PLC Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by TOSHIBA CORPORATION HITACHI PLC Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems Co., Ltd.

  • Page 31: How To Read This Manual

    HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL About each of functions This manual includes information of GT Designer2 Version2.27D. For additional functions of upgraded version, refer to the List of functions added by version upgrade. Symbols Following symbols are used in this manual. Refers to the information required.
  • Page 32 MEMO A - 30...

  • Page 33: Overview

    GOT......page 1-4 This section describes the connections and functions supported by the GOT1000 Series. Please read this section to confirm the connection overview.
  • Page 34 Relevant Manuals There are the following manuals available for use of the GOT1000 series. Refer to each of them according to the intended purpose. (1) Installing software Drawing Data transfer For operations from creating project data to transferring data to GOT, refer to the following manuals.
  • Page 35 The following manuals are also available. The following manuals are stored in the GT Works2/GT Designer2 in PDF format. (a) GOT1000 Series Extended/Option Functions Manual Describes how to use the ladder monitoring function, system monitor function and list editor for A/F, network monitor function, Q motion monitor function, servo amplifier monitor function, CNC monitor function, intelligent module monitor function.

  • Page 36: Connections And Functions Supported By Got

    1.1 Connections and Functions Supported by GOT Various connection types The GOT can perform monitoring with the following connection types for MITSUBISHI PLC. The connection type suitable for your system configuration or usage can be selected. Connection type Application Reference...
  • Page 37 Connection with another manufacture's PLC Since the GOT can monitor a PLC manufactured by a vendor other than Mitsubishi, the flexible system configuration is available. • OMRON PLC ( Chapter 9 CONNECTION TO OMRON PLC) • KEYENCE PLC( Chapter 10 CONNECTON TO KEYENCE PLC ) •...
  • Page 38 Devices Application Reference By connecting the built-in RS-232 and RS-422 interfaces Chapter 30 MULTIPLE-GT11 Multiple-GT11 connection function alternately among the GT11s, multiple GT11s can be CONNECTION FUNCTION connected. This function allows data transfer between GOTs, remote monitoring and remote maintenance via Ethernet. Gateway function Reading or writing the gateway device (EG) in the GOT is Chapter 31 GATEWAY FUNCTION...

  • Page 39: Overall System Configurations

    1.2 Overall System Configurations The following shows the system configurations for each GOT model. GT15 system configuration Bus connection Chapter 2) Communication Type Communication Interface on GOT Side Connected to Bus connection unit • QCPU (Q mode) • GT15-75QBUSL • Motion controller CPU (Q Series) •...
  • Page 40 Direct connection to CPU Chapter 3) Communication Type Communication Interface on GOT Side Connected to Built in GT15 body • QCPU (Q mode) • QCPU (A mode) • FXCPU RS-232 • Motion controller CPU (Q Series) • Remote I/O station in the MELSECNET/H network system RS-232 communication...
  • Page 41 Computer link connection Chapter 4) Communication Type Communication Interface on GOT Side Connected to Built in GT15 body Serial communication module • QCPU (Q mode) • QnACPU RS-232 • Motion controller CPU (Q Series) • Remote I/O station in the MELSECNET/H network system RS-232 Computer link module...
  • Page 42 CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) Chapter 6) Communication Type Communication Interface on GOT Side Connected to CC-Link module CC-Link communication unit • QCPU (Q mode) • GT15-75J61BT13-Z • QCPU (A mode) CC-Link • QnACPU • ACPU • Motion controller CPU (Q Series) •...
  • Page 43 Third party PLC connections Chapter 9 to Chapter 18) Communication Type Communication Interface on GOT Side Connected to Built in GT15 body • OMRON PLC • KEYENCE PLC • SHARP PLC RS-232 • TOSHIBA PLC • HITACHI PLC • MATSUSITA PLC •...
  • Page 44 Microcomputer connection Chapter 19) Communication Type Communication Interface on GOT Side Connected to Built in GT15 body • PC • Microcomputer • PLC, RS-232 etc. RS-232 communication RS-232 Communication Unit • GT15-RS2-9P RS-422 conversion unit • GT15-RS2T4-9P RS-232 RS-422 communication RS-422/485 Communication Unit •...
  • Page 45 Temperature controller connection Chapter 20 to Chapter 22) Communication Type Communication Interface on GOT Side Connected to Built in GT15 body • OMRON temperature controller • YAMATAKE temperature controller • RKC temperature controller RS-232 RS-232 communication RS-232 Communication Unit • GT15-RS2-9P RS-422 conversion unit •...
  • Page 46 Other connections Chapter 23 to Chapter 27) Communication Type Communication Interface on GOT Side Connected to Built in GT15 body • Inverter • Servo amplifier • Bar code reader RS-232 • CNC RS-232 communication RS-422/485 Communication Unit • Inverter • GT15-RS4-9S •...
  • Page 47 Communication Type Communication Interface on GOT Side Connected to Printer unit • Printer • GT15-PRN Printer 1 - 15 1.2 Overall System Configurations...
  • Page 48 GT11 system configuration Direct connection to CPU Chapter 3) Communication Type Communication Interface on GOT Side Connected to Built in GT11 body • QCPU (Q mode) • QCPU (A mode) • FXCPU RS-232 RS-232 • Motion controller CPU (Q Series) communication •...
  • Page 49 Third party PLC connections Chapter 9 to Chapter 18) Communication Type Communication Interface on GOT Side Connected to • OMRON PLC • KEYENCE PLC Built in GT11 body • SHARP PLC • TOSHIBA PLC RS-232 RS-232 • HITACHI PLC communication •...
  • Page 50 Temperature controller connection Chapter 20 to Chapter 22) Communication Type Communication Interface on GOT Side Connected to Built in GT11 body • OMRON temperature controller • YAMATAKE temperature controller • RKC temperature controller RS-232 RS-232 communication Built in GT11 body •...

  • Page 51: Mitsubishi Plc Connections

    MITSUBISHI PLC CONNECTIONS Chapter 2 BUS CONNECTION Chapter 3 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU Chapter 4 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION Chapter 5 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Chapter 6 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) Chapter 7 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) Chapter 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION...
  • Page 52 MEMO...

  • Page 53: Bus Connection

    BUS CONNECTION 2.1 System Configuration ..page 2-2 This section describes the equipment and cables needed for bus connection. Select a system suitable for your application. 2.2 Preparatory Procedures for Monitoring .

  • Page 54: System Configuration

    2.1 System Configuration Select a system configuration suitable for your application. (1) Conventions used in this section Numbers (e.g. ) of System configuration and connection conditions correspond to the numbers (e.g. ) of System equipment. Use these numbers as references when confirming models and applications. (2) About connection cables Select a proper connection cable whose length satisfies the distance conditions according to the connection conditions.

  • Page 55: Connecting To Qcpu (Q Mode)

    2.1.1 Connecting to QCPU (Q mode) Communication driver Bus(Q) System configurations and connection conditions Connection conditions System configuration Number of Distance from main GOTs base unit to 1st GOT 13.2m or less Connection cable MAX13.2m Bus extension connector box* More than 13.2m Connection cable MAX13.2m MAX37m...
  • Page 56 Bus extension connector box When installing the 1st GOT 13.2m or more away from the main base unit, the bus extension connector box is required. System equipment (1) GOT Image Name Model name Terminal Bus connection unit GT15-75QBUSL, GT15-75QBUS2L, GT15-QBUS, GT15-QBUS2 •...

  • Page 57: Connecting To Qnacpu Or Ancpu Type

    2.1.2 Connecting to QnACPU or AnCPU type Communication driver Bus(A/QnA) System configuration and connection conditions Connection conditions System configuration Number of Distance from main base unit to 1st GOT GOTs 6.6m or less Connection cable MAX6.6m Bus connector conversion box Connection More than 6.6m Connection cable...
  • Page 58 Bus connector conversion box When installing the 1st GOT 6.6m or more away from the main base unit, the bus connector conversion box is required. System equipment (1) GOT Image Name Model name Terminal GT15-75ABUSL, GT15-75ABUS2L, GT15-ABUS Bus connection unit GT15-ABUS2 •...
  • Page 59 When using GT15-C EXSS-1 or GT15-C BS, perform the grounding in the following steps. (1) When using GT15-C EXSS-1 Not connected (GT15-C (GT15-EXCNB) 2SQ cables to FG terminals, 28cm or less Connect the LG and FG terminals of the terminal block on the GOT unit power and ground them with a cable.

  • Page 60: Connecting To Qnascpu Or Anscpu Type

    2.1.3 Connecting to QnASCPU or AnSCPU type Communication driver Bus(A/QnA) System configuration and connection conditions (1) When using no extension base unit Connection conditions Number of System configuration Distance from main base unit to 1st GOT GOTs 5m or less Connection cable MAX5m More than 5m,...
  • Page 61 (from previous page) Connection conditions System configuration Number of Distance from main base unit to 1st GOT GOTs Connection cable Connection cable 5m or less MAX5m MAX35m Connection cable Connection cable MAX30m Bus connector More than 5m conversion box Connection Connection Connection Cable...
  • Page 62 (2) When using the extension base unit Connection conditions System configuration Number of Distance from main base unit to 1st GOT GOTs 6m or less Connection cable (a)+(b)=MAX6m Connection cable (b)=MAX30m (a)+(b)=MAX36m More than 6m Bus connector conversion box Connection Connection cable cable (a)+(b)=MAX6m...
  • Page 63 (from previous page) Connection conditions System configuration Number of Distance from main base unit to 1st GOT GOTs Connection cable Connection cable 6m or less (a)+(b)=MAX6m (a)+(b)+(c)=MAX36m Connection cable Connection cable (b)+(c)=MAX30m (a)+(b)+(c)=MAX36m More than 6m Bus connector conversion box Connection Connection Connection...
  • Page 64 System equipment (1) GOT Image Name Model name Terminal GT15-75ABUSL, GT15-75ABUS2L, GT15-ABUS Bus connection unit GT15-ABUS2 • For terminal GOT Intermediary Bus connection unit GT15-75ABUS2L, GT15-ABUS2 • For intermediary GOT About the bus connection unit GT15-75ABUSL, GT15-ABUS: Used for a terminal GOT. (Not available for an intermediary GOT.) GT15-75ABUS2L, GT15-ABUS2: Used for an intermediary GOT.
  • Page 65 When using GT15-C EXSS-1 or GT15-C BS, perform the grounding in the following steps. (1) When using GT15-C EXSS-1 Not connected (GT15-C (GT15-EXCNB) 2SQ cables to FG terminals, 28cm or less Connect the LG and FG terminals of the terminal block on the GOT unit power and ground them with a cable.

  • Page 66: Connecting To A0J2Hcpu

    2.1.4 Connecting to A0J2HCPU Communication driver Bus(A/QnA) System configurations and connection conditions Connection conditions System configuration Number of Distance from main base unit to 1st GOT GOTs Power supply module 1m or less connection connection cable cable MAX1m MAX6.6m The number of connectable GOTs is restricted depending on the number of intelligent function modules mounted to the A0J2HCPU.

  • Page 67: Connecting To Motion Controller Cpu (Q Series)

    2.1.5 Connecting to motion controller CPU (Q Series) Communication driver Bus(Q) A motion controller CPU (Q Series) mounted to the multiple CPU system of the QCPU (Q mode) can be monitored. The system configuration, connection conditions, and system equipment for connection to a motion controller CPU (Q Series) are the same as those for connection to the QCPU (Q mode).

  • Page 68: Connecting To Motion Controller Cpu (A273Ucpu, A273Uhcpu(-S3), A373Ucpu(-S3))

    2.1.6 Connecting to motion controller CPU (A273UCPU, A273UHCPU(-S3), A373UCPU(-S3)) Communication driver Bus(A/QnA) System configuration and connection conditions (1) When using no extension base unit Connection conditions System configuration Number of Distance from main base unit to 1st GOT GOTs 2.5m or less Connection cable MAX2.5m Bus connector conversion box...

  • Page 69: System Configuration

    (2) When using the extension base unit Connection conditions System configuration Number of Distance from main base unit to 1st GOT GOTs 6.6m or less Connection Connection cable Cable MAX6.6m Bus connector conversion box Connection Connection More than 6.6m Connection cable cable Cable MAX6.6m...
  • Page 70 System equipment (1) GOT Image Name Model name Terminal GT15-75ABUSL, GT15-75ABUS2L, GT15-ABUS Bus connection unit GT15-ABUS2 • For terminal GOT Intermediary Bus connection unit GT15-75ABUS2L, GT15-ABUS2 • For intermediary GOT About the bus connection unit GT15-75ABUSL, GT15-ABUS: Used for a terminal GOT. (Not available for an intermediary GOT.) GT15-75ABUS2L, GT15-ABUS2: Used for an intermediary GOT.
  • Page 71 When using GT15-C EXSS-1 or GT15-C BS, perform the grounding in the following steps. (1) When using GT15-C EXSS-1 Not connected (GT15-C (GT15-EXCNB) 2SQ cables to FG terminals, 28cm or less Connect the LG and FG terminals of the terminal block on the GOT unit power and ground them with a cable.

  • Page 72: Connecting To Motion Controller Cpu (A171Shcpun, A172Shcpun, A173Uhcpu(-S1))

    2.1.7 Connecting to motion controller CPU (A171SHCPUN, A172SHCPUN, A173UHCPU(-S1)) Communication driver Bus(A/QnA) System configuration and connection conditions (1) When using no extension base unit Connection conditions System configuration Number of Distance from main base unit to 1st GOT GOTs 3m or less Connection cable MAX3m More than 3m,...
  • Page 73 (from previous page) Connection conditions System configuration Number of Distance from main base unit to 1st GOT GOTs Connection cable Connection cable 3m or less MAX3m MAX33m Connection cable Connection cable MAX30m Bus connector More than 3m conversion box Connection Connection Connection cable...
  • Page 74 (2) When using the extension base unit Connection conditions System configuration Number of Distance from main base unit to 1st GOT GOTs 3m or less Connection cable (a)+(b)=MAX3m Connection cable (b)=MAX30m (a)+(b)=MAX33m More than 3m Bus connector conversion box Connection Connection cable cable (a)+(b)=MAX3m...
  • Page 75 (from previous page) Connection conditions System configuration Number of Distance from main base unit to 1st GOT GOTs Connection cable Connection cable 3m or less (a)+(b)=MAX3m (a)+(b)+(c)=MAX33m Connection cable Connection cable (b)+(c)=MAX30m (a)+(b)+(c)=MAX33m More than 3m Bus connector conversion box Connection Connection Connection...

  • Page 76: Connection Cable

    System equipment (1) GOT Image Name Model name Terminal GT15-75ABUSL, GT15-75ABUS2L, GT15-ABUS Bus connection unit GT15-ABUS2 • For terminal GOT Intermediary Bus connection unit GT15-75ABUS2L, GT15-ABUS2 • For intermediary GOT About the bus connection unit GT15-75ABUSL, GT15-ABUS: Used for a terminal GOT. (Not available for an intermediary GOT.) GT15-75ABUS2L, GT15-ABUS2: Used for an intermediary GOT.
  • Page 77 When using GT15-C EXSS-1 or GT15-C BS, perform the grounding in the following steps. (1) When using GT15-C EXSS-1 Not connected (GT15-C (GT15-EXCNB) 2SQ cables to FG terminals, 28cm or less Connect the LG and FG terminals of the terminal block on the GOT unit power and ground them with a cable.

  • Page 78: Preparatory Procedures For Monitoring

    2.2 Preparatory Procedures for Monitoring The following shows the procedures to be taken before monitoring and corresponding reference sections. Section 2.2.1 Install the OS onto the GOT. Installing OS onto GOT Section 2.2.2 Make sure that the OS is installed on the GOT. Checking OS installation on GOT Section 2.2.3 Set the communication interface.

  • Page 79: Installing Os Onto Got

    2.2.1 Installing OS onto GOT Install the standard monitor OS, communication driver and option OS onto the GOT. For the OS installation methods, refer to the following manual. GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual Check either of the following under the Communication driver. •...

  • Page 80: Checking Os Installation On Got

    2.2.2 Checking OS installation on GOT Check if the OS is properly installed or not on the Drive information tab of GT Designer2. For the operation on the Drive information tab, refer to the following manual. GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual The OS has been installed successfully on the GOT if the following can be confirmed: 1) Standard monitor OS...

  • Page 81: Setting Communication Interface (Communication Settings)

    2.2.3 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) Make the GOT communication interface settings on [Communication setting] of GT Designer2. Select the same communication driver as the one installed on the GOT for each communication interface. For details on [Communication setting] of GT Designer2, refer to the following manual. GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual Communication settings...

  • Page 82: Preparatory Procedures For Monitoring

    Communication detail settings (1) Bus(Q) Item Description Range Stage No. <Default: 1> 1 to 7 Slot No. <Default: 0> 0 to 9 (2) Bus(A/QnA) Item Description Range Stage No. <Default: 1> 1 to 7 Slot No. <Default: 0> 0 to 7 (1) Communication interface setting by Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility's "Communication setting"...
  • Page 83 Setting Stage No. and Slot No. Before setting Stage No. and Slot No. The PLC CPU recognizes the GOT as follows. • QCPU (Q mode) : Intelligent function module of 16 I/O points • Other than QCPU (Q mode) : Intelligent function module of 32 I/O points At the [Communication Detail Settings], assign the GOT to an empty I/O slot on the PLC CPU.
  • Page 84 When connecting to motion controller CPU (Q Series) In the [Base Setting] on MT Developer, set "10" to the number of slots for the extension base used for GOT connection. Example: When setting "2" to Stage No. and "0" to Slot No. in the communication interface settings, set "10"...

  • Page 85: Setting Communication Interface (Communication Settings)

    Setting unused I/O slots to empty (0 points) (only when connecting to QCPU (Q mode)) Setting unused I/O slots as empty slots (0 points) from "PC parameters" "I/O assignments" of GX Developer allows you to use I/O numbers of "16 points x number of empty slots"...
  • Page 86 (2) When connecting to other than QCPU (Q mode) Assign the GOT to an empty I/O slot on the extension base unit. When there is no extension base unit or no empty I/O slots are left on an extension base unit, set an additional stage, and assign the GOT to one of the I/O slots.
  • Page 87 Write down the items selected in this section to the check sheet. Communication setting. (Stage No., Slot No.) Write Check Sheet Section 2.4 Communication Check Sheet When using the bus extension connector box, mark the check sheet after confirming that the Stage No. of the GOT is the same as the Stage No. of the bus extension connector box.

  • Page 88: Downloading Project Data

    2.2.4 Downloading project data Download project data to the GOT. For how to download project data, refer to the following manual. GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual Check the necessary items and click the button. Download Download 2 - 36 2.2 Preparatory Procedures for Monitoring 2.2.4 Downloading project data...

  • Page 89: Attaching Communication Unit And Connecting Cable

    2.2.5 Attaching communication unit and connecting cable Cautions when attaching the communication unit and connecting the cable Shut off all phases of the GOT power supply before attaching the communication unit and connecting the cable. Attaching the communication unit (1) When mounting GT15-75QBUS, GT15-75QBUS2, GT15-75ABUSL, GT15-75ABUS2L Attach the bus connection unit to the extension unit connector on the GOT.
  • Page 90 Connecting the cable Connect the bus connection cable to the bus connection unit. 2 - 38 2.2 Preparatory Procedures for Monitoring 2.2.5 Attaching communication unit and connecting cable...

  • Page 91: Verifying Got Recognizes Connected Equipment

    2.2.6 Verifying GOT recognizes connected equipment Verify the GOT recognizes connected equipments on [Communication setting] of the Utility. • Channel number of communication interface, communication drivers allocation status • Communication unit installation status Remark How to display Utility(at default), utility call key 1-point press on GOT screen upper-left corner When using GT1595-X Utility display...

  • Page 92: Verifying Got Recognizes Connected Equipment

    After powering up the GOT, touch [Main Menu] [Communication setting] from the Utility. The [Communication setting] appears. Verify that the following communication driver name is displayed in the box for the communication interface to be used. • Communication driver (either of the following) Q BUS A/QnA BUS...
  • Page 93 When changing communication interface setting by Utility The communication interface setting can be changed by the Utility. For details on the Utility, refer to the following manual. User's Manual When you have verified in the Communication setting that the GOT recognizes the connected equipment, mark the check sheet.

  • Page 94: Checking For Normal Monitoring

    2.2.7 Checking for normal monitoring Check for errors occurring on the GOT. Presetting the system alarm to project data allows you to identify errors occurred on the GOT, PLC CPU, servo amplifier and communications. For details on the system alarm, refer to the following manual. User’s Manual (When using GT15) Communication...
  • Page 95 Check if the PLC CPU recognizes the GOT. (QCPU (Q mode) only) Using the [System monitor] of GX Developer, check if the PLC CPU recognizes the GOT or not. For details on GX Developer operations, refer to the following manual. GX Developer Version Operating Manual (1) Check the Module Name, I/O Address and Implementation Position.

  • Page 96: Precautions

    Remark Operations causing automatic reboot of the GOT1000 Series Since the GOT1000 Series is automatically rebooted in the following cases, the power does not need to be reapplied to the GOT (OFF to ON). • When an OS is installed from GT Designer2 or a CF card •...
  • Page 97 Reset switch on GOT When bus connection is used, the reset switch on the GOT does not function. Powering OFF or resetting the PLC (1) When turning OFF or resetting the PLC during monitoring When turning OFF or resetting the PLC during monitoring, the system alarm (No.402: timeout error) is generated.

  • Page 98: Precautions

    When designing the system When the GOT is OFF, the following currents are supplied to the GOT from the PLC CPU side (the power supply module on the main base unit). (The GOT does not operate when it is OFF.) Design the system so that the 5V DC current consumption of the modules on the main base unit and the total current consumption of the GOTs will not exceed the rated output current of 5V DC of the power supply module in use.
  • Page 99 (3) When using a Q00J/Q00/Q01CPU When a GOT is bus-connected to a Q00JCPU, number of extension stages including the GOT must be 2 or less. When a GOT is bus-connected to a Q00CPU or Q01CPU, number of extension stages including the GOT must be 4 or less.
  • Page 100 When connecting to a QnA(S)CPU or An(S)CPU type (1) When connecting with a QnASCPU type and an AnSCPU type A GOT can be connected to an extension connector on only one side of the main base unit. (Concurrently connecting GOTs to extension connectors on both sides is not allowed.) Extension stage 1 Stage No.
  • Page 101 When connecting multiple GOTs (1) System including different GOT series The GOT1000 series cannot be used with different GOT series in a system. GOT1000 GOT-A900 GOT800 (2) Restrictions on No. of GOTs The number of connectable GOTs is restricted according to the CPU type and the number of intelligent function modules.
  • Page 102 The version can be confirmed in the DATE field of the rating plate. Enlarged view of rating plate MITSUBISHI PROGRAMABLE CONTOROLLER DATE 9806 B MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORP. JAPAN Caution Version of redundant extension base unit Precautions for Q4ARCPU redundant system configurations The GOT does not operate normally in the following system configurations.

  • Page 103: Communication Check Sheet

    2.4 Communication Check Sheet This section explains a check sheet by which the information can be checked beforehand when starting communications by bus connection. How to use the check sheet Sections 2.1 and 2.2 contain explanations of the items to be checked on the check sheet. Checking items explained these sections using the check sheet on the following page allows you to complete the procedures for communications between the GOT and the PLC CPU.
  • Page 104 Communication check sheet [Sheet No. Item Version Check mark OS type (Refer to) (Refer to) (Refer to) Standard monitor OS Not OK Ver. (Section 2.2.1) (Section 2.2.2) Standard monitor OS Font Not OK Ver. (Section 2.2.1) (Section 2.2.1) (Section 2.2.2) Not OK Ver.

  • Page 105: List Of Functions Added By Version Upgrade

    DIRECT CONNECTION TO 3.1 System Configuration ..page 3-2 This section describes the equipment and cables needed for direct connection to a CPU. Select a system suitable for your application. 3.2 Connection Cable ... . page 3-18 This section describes the specifications of the cables needed when connecting a GOT to a FX PLC.

  • Page 106: System Configuration

    3.1 System Configuration Select a system configuration suitable for your application. Conventions used in this section Numbers (e.g. ) of System configuration and connection conditions correspond to the numbers (e.g. ) of System equipment. Use these numbers as references when confirming models and applications. 3 - 2 3.1 System Configuration...

  • Page 107: Connecting To Qcpu

    3.1.1 Connecting to QCPU Communication driver A/QnA/QCPU,QJ71C24, MELDAS C6* System configuration and connection conditions Connection conditions System configuration Number of Distance GOTs RS-232 cable 3m or less MAX3m RS-422 conversion RS-422 cable cable 30.5m or less MAX30.5m System equipment (1) GOT Image Name Model name...
  • Page 108 (3) Cable Image Name Model name RS-232 cable GT01-C30R2-6P (3m) • Between QCPU and GOT RS-422 conversion cable FA-CNV2402CBL (0.2m), FA-CNV2405CBL (0.5m) • Between QCPU and RS-422 RS-422 cable GT01-C30R4-25P (3m), GT01-C100R4-25P (10m), • Between RS-422 conversion GT01-C200R4-25P (20m), GT01-C300R4-25P (30m) cable and GOT 3 - 4 3.1 System Configuration...

  • Page 109: System Configuration

    3.1.2 Connecting to QnACPU or ACPU Communication driver A/QnA/QCPU,QJ71C24, MELDAS C6* System configuration and connection conditions Connection conditions System configuration Number of Distance GOTs RS-422 cable 30m or less MAX30m System equipment (1) GOT Image Name Model name RS-232 RS-422 conversion unit GT15-RS2T4-9P •...

  • Page 110: System Configuration

    3.1.3 Connecting to FXCPU (FX , FX , FX , FX , FX , FX Series) Communication driver MELSEC-FX System configuration and connection conditions Connecting to FXCPU (FX , FX Series) Connection conditions System configuration Number of Distance GOTs RS-422 cable 30m or less MAX30m Connecting to FXCPU (FX...
  • Page 111 (2) Cable Image Name Model name RS-422 cable GT01-C10R4-8P (1m), GT01-C30R4-8P (3m), • Between FXCPU (FX , FX GT01-C100R4-8P (10m), GT01-C200R4-8P (20m), ) and GOT GT01-C300R4-8P (30m) RS-422 cable GT01-C30R4-25P (3m), GT01-C100R4-25P (10m), • Between FXCPU (FX , FX GT01-C200R4-25P (20m), GT01-C300R4-25P (30m) ) and GOT 3 - 7...

  • Page 112: Connecting To Fxcpu (Fx 1S , Fx 1N , Fx 2N Series)

    3.1.4 Connecting to FXCPU (FX , FX , FX Series) Communication driver MELSEC-FX System configuration and connection conditions Connection conditions System configuration Number of Distance GOTs RS-422 cable MAX30m Function expansion board 30m or less RS-422 cable MAX30m Function expansion board RS-232 cable MAX15m 15m or less...
  • Page 113 System equipment (1) GOT Image Name Model name RS-232 RS-422 conversion unit GT15-RS2T4-9P • For RS-422 communication RS-422/485 RS-422/485 RS-422/485 Communication Unit GT15-RS4-9S • For RS-422 communication RS-422 RS-422 interface (Built into GOT) • For RS-422 communication RS-232 RS-232 interface (Built into GOT) •...
  • Page 114 (2) PLC Image Name Model name *1*2 -422-BD, -422-BD Function expansion board • Unit for simultaneously -232-BD, -232-BD connecting GOT and peripheral equipment (GX -CNV-BD, -CNV-BD Developer, etc.) to FXCPU -232ADP Function adapter -232ADP When the function expansion board or function adapter is used, a GOT and a peripheral such as a PC with GX Developer installed can be connected to the FXCPU and the function expansion board or function adapter individually.

  • Page 115: System Configuration

    3.1.5 Connecting to FXCPU (FX , FX Series) Communication driver MELSEC-FX System configuration and connection conditions Connection conditions System configuration Number of Distance GOTs RS-422 cable 30m or less MAX30m Function adapter 15m or less RS-232 cable MAX15m Function adapter 15m or less RS-232 cable MAX15m...
  • Page 116 Image Name Model name RS-232 RS-232 interface (Built into GOT) • For RS-232 communication RS-232 RS-232 RS-232 Communication Unit GT15-RS2-9P • For RS-232 communication Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). 3 - 12 3.1 System Configuration 3.1.5 Connecting to FXCPU (FX1NC, FX2NC Series)

  • Page 117: Rs-232 Cable

    (2) PLC Image Name Model name -232ADP Function adapter -232ADP When the function adapter is used, a GOT and a peripheral such as a PC with GX Developer installed can be connected to the FXCPU and the function adapter individually. Function adapter FXCPU (3) Cable...

  • Page 118: System Configuration

    3.1.6 Connecting to FXCPU (FX Series) Communication driver MELSEC-FX System configuration and connection conditions Connection conditions System configuration Number of Distance GOTs RS-422 cable MAX30m 30m or less Function expansion board RS-422 cable MAX30m Function expansion board RS-232 cable MAX15m 3 4 5 Function adapter Function expansion...

  • Page 119: System Configuration

    System equipment (1) GOT Image Name Model name RS-232 RS-422 conversion unit GT15-RS2T4-9P • For RS-422 communication RS-422/485 RS-422/485 RS-422/485 Communication Unit GT15-RS4-9S • For RS-422 communication RS-422 RS-422 interface (Built into GOT) • For RS-422 communication RS-232 RS-232 interface (Built into GOT) •...

  • Page 120: Rs-422 Cable

    (2) PLC Image Name Model name *2*3*4 -422-BD Function expansion board • Unit for simultaneously -232-BD connecting GOT and peripheral equipment (GX -CNV-BD Developer, etc.) *2*3*4 -232ADP, FX -485ADP Function adapter When the function expansion board or function adapter is used, a GOT and a peripheral such as a PC with GX Developer installed can be connected to the FXCPU and the function expansion board or function adapter individually.

  • Page 121: Connecting To Motion Controller Cpu

    3.1.7 Connecting to motion controller CPU Communication driver A/QnA/QCPU,QJ71C24, MELDAS C6* A motion controller CPU (Q Series) mounted to the multiple CPU system of the QCPU (Q mode) can be monitored. The system configuration, connection conditions, and system equipment when connecting a GOT to a motion controller CPU (Q Series) are the same as those for the QCPU.

  • Page 122: Connection Cable

    3.2 Connection Cable The RS-232 cable used for connecting the GOT to the FX PLC can be prepared by the user. The following provides connection diagrams for each cable, connector specifications and other information. Connection cable Model name RS-232 cable (Refer to Section 3.2.1) Function -232-BD, FX...

  • Page 123: Connection Cable

    Connector specifications (1) GOT side connector Use the following as the RS-232 interface and RS-232 communication unit connector on the GOT. For the GOT side of the RS-232 cable, use a connector or connector cover applicable to the GOT connector. (a) Connector type 9-pin D-sub (male) inch screw fixed type (b) Connector model...

  • Page 124: Preparatory Procedures For Monitoring

    3.3 Preparatory Procedure for Monitoring The following shows the procedures to be taken before monitoring and corresponding reference sections. Section 3.3.1 Install the OS onto the GOT. Installing OS onto GOT Section 3.3.2 Make sure that the OS is installed on the GOT. Checking OS installation on GOT Section 3.3.3 Set the communication interface.

  • Page 125: Installing Os Onto Got

    3.3.1 Installing OS onto GOT Install the standard monitor OS, communication driver and option OS onto the GOT. For the OS installation methods, refer to the following manual. GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual Check either of the following under the Communication driver. •...

  • Page 126: Checking Os Installation On Got

    3.3.2 Checking OS installation on GOT Check if the OS is properly installed or not on the Drive information tab of GT Designer2. For the operation on the Drive information tab, refer to the following manual. GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual The OS has been installed successfully on the GOT if the following can be confirmed: 1) Standard monitor OS...

  • Page 127: Setting Communication Interface (Communication Settings)

    3.3.3 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) Make the GOT communication interface settings on [Communication setting] of GT Designer2. Select the same communication driver as the one installed on the GOT for each communication interface. For details on [Communication setting] of GT Designer2, refer to the following manual. GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual Communication settings...
  • Page 128 Communication detail settings (1) A/QnA/QCPU, QJ71C24, MELDAS C6* Item Description Range Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication with the connected equipment. 9600bps, 19200bps, <Default: 115200bps> Transmission Speed 38400bps, 57600bps, When the setting exceeds the limit of the connected 115200bps equipment, communication is performed at the fastest transmission speed supported by the connected equipment...

  • Page 129: Setting Communication Interface (Communication Settings)

    (2) MELSEC-FX Item Description Range Set this item when change the transmission speed used for 9600bps, 19200bps, Transmission Speed communication with the connected equipment. 38400bps, 57600bps, <Default: 38400bps> 115200bps (1) Communication interface setting by Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility's "Communication setting"...

  • Page 130: Downloading Project Data

    3.3.4 Downloading project data Download project data to the GOT. For how to download project data, refer to the following manual. GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual Check the necessary items and click the button. Download Download 3 - 26 3.3 Preparatory Procedure for Monitoring 3.3.4 Downloading project data...

  • Page 131: Attaching Communication Unit And Connecting Cable

    3.3.5 Attaching communication unit and connecting cable Cautions when attaching the communication unit and connecting the cable Shut off all phases of the GOT power supply before attaching the communication unit and connecting the cable. Attaching the communication unit Attach the serial communication unit to the extension unit connector on the GOT.

  • Page 132: Attaching Communication Unit And Connecting Cable

    How to connect the cable (1) How to connect the RS-232 cable (a) For the GT15 • connection to the RS-232 interface Connect the RS-232 cable to the RS-232 interface on the GOT. • connection to the RS-232 communication unit Connect the RS-232 cable to the RS-232 communication unit on the GOT.

  • Page 133: Rs-422 Cable

    (2) How to connect the RS-422 cable (a) For the GT15 • connection to the RS-232 interface Connect the RS-422 conversion unit to the RS- 232 interface on the GOT. Connect the RS-422 cable to the RS-422 conversion unit. • connection to the RS-422/485 communication unit Connect the RS-232 cable to the RS-232 communication unit on the GOT.
  • Page 134 When using the RS-422 conversion unit On "Communication settings" on the utility, make setting so that 5V DC power is supplied to the RS-422 conversion unit from the RS-232 interface on the GOT. For details on the utility, refer to the following manual: User's Manual Touch [5V supply].

  • Page 135: Verifying Got Recognizes Connected Equipment

    3.3.6 Verifying GOT recognizes connected equipment Verify the GOT recognizes connected equipments on [Communication setting] of the Utility. • Channel number of communication interface, communication drivers allocation status • Communication unit installation status Remark How to display Utility(at default), utility call key 1-point press on GOT screen upper-left corner When using GT1595-X Utility display...

  • Page 136: Verifying Got Recognizes Connected Equipment

    The [Communication setting] appears. Verify that the following communication driver name is displayed in the box for the communication interface to be used. • Communication driver (either of the following) A/QnA/QCPU, QJ71C24 MELSEC-FX When the communication driver name is not displayed normally, carry out the following procedure again.

  • Page 137: Checking For Normal Monitoring

    3.3.7 Checking for normal monitoring Check for errors occurring on the GOT. Presetting the system alarm to project data allows you to identify errors occurred on the GOT, PLC CPU, servo amplifier and communications. For details on the system alarm, refer to the following manual. User’s Manual (When using GT15) Communication...

  • Page 138: Checking For Normal Monitoring

    Perform an I/O check. Whether the PLC can communicate with the GOT or not can be checked by the I/O check function. If this check ends successfully, it means correct communication interface settings and proper cable connection. Display the I/O check screen by [Main Menu] [Debug &...

  • Page 139: Precautions

    3.4 Precautions When connecting to FXCPU (FX3U/FX3UC series) When the keyword of FXCPU (FX3U/FX3UC series) has been set, GOT may not be able to monitoring. Perform an I/O check again. ( Perform an I/O check.) When the result of the I/O check is normal, check the status of keyword registration. 3 - 35 3.4 Precautions 3.3.7 Checking for normal monitoring...

  • Page 140: List Of Functions Added By Version Upgrade

    3.5 List of Functions Added by Version Upgrade The following describes the function added by version upgrade of GT Designer2 or OS. For using the function below, use the GT Designer2 or OS of the stated version or later. Version of GT Item Description Version of OS...

  • Page 141: Plc Side Setting

    COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 4.1 System Configuration ..page 4-2 This section describes the equipment and cables needed for computer link connection. Select a system suitable for your application. 4.2 Connection Cable ... . page 4-17 This section describes the specifications of the cables needed for establishing a computer link connection.

  • Page 142: System Configuration

    4.1 System Configuration Select a system configuration suitable for your application. Conventions used in this section Numbers (e.g. ) of System configuration and connection conditions correspond to the numbers (e.g. ) of System equipment. Use these numbers as references when confirming models and applications. 4.1.1 Connecting to QCPU (Q mode) Communication driver...
  • Page 143 System equipment (1) GOT Image Name Model name RS-232 RS-232 interface (Built into GOT) • For RS-232 communication RS-232 RS-232 RS-232 Communication Unit GT15-RS2-9P • For RS-232 communication RS-232 RS-422 conversion unit GT15-RS2T4-9P • For RS-422 communication RS-422/485 RS-422/485 RS-422/485 Communication Unit GT15-RS4-9S •...

  • Page 144: Connecting To Qcpu (A Mode)

    4.1.2 Connecting to QCPU (A mode) Communication driver AJ71C24/UC24 System configuration and connection conditions Connection conditions System configuration Number of Distance GOTs Computer link module 15m or less RS-232 cable 1) MAX15m Computer link module 500m or less RS-422 cable MAX500m 4 - 4 4.1 System Configuration...
  • Page 145 System equipment (1) GOT Image Name Model name RS-232 RS-232 interface (Built into GOT) • For RS-232 communication RS-232 RS-232 RS-232 Communication Unit GT15-RS2-9P • For RS-232 communication RS-232 RS-422 conversion unit GT15-RS2T4-9P • For RS-422 communication RS-422/485 RS-422/485 RS-422/485 Communication Unit GT15-RS4-9S •...

  • Page 146: Connecting To Qnacpu Type

    4.1.3 Connecting to QnACPU type Communication driver AJ71QC24 System configuration and connection conditions Connection conditions System configuration Number of Distance GOTs Serial communication module Computer link module *1 15m or less RS-232 cable 2) MAX15m Serial communication module 30m or less RS-422 cable MAX30m Serial communication module...
  • Page 147 System equipment (1) GOT Image Name Model name RS-232 RS-232 interface (Built into GOT) • For RS-232 communication RS-232 RS-232 RS-232 Communication Unit GT15-RS2-9P • For RS-232 communication RS-232 RS-422 conversion unit GT15-RS2T4-9P • For RS-422 communication RS-422/485 RS-422/485 RS-422/485 Communication Unit GT15-RS4-9S •...

  • Page 148: System Configuration

    (3) Cable Image Name Model name RS-232 cable 2) (To be prepared by the user. Section 4.2 Connection Cable) GT01-C30R4-25P (3m), GT01-C100R4-25P (10m), GT01-C200R4-25P (20m), GT01-C300R4-25P (30m) RS-422 cable (To be prepared by the user. Section 4.2 Connection Cable) 4 - 8 4.1 System Configuration 4.1.3 Connecting to QnACPU type...

  • Page 149: Connecting To Qnascpu Type

    4.1.4 Connecting to QnASCPU type Communication driver AJ71QC24 System configuration and connection conditions Connection conditions System configuration Number of Distance GOTs Serial communication module Computer link module *1 15m or less RS-232 cable 1) MAX15m Serial communication module RS-422 cable 1200m or less MAX1200m Computer link module *1...
  • Page 150 System equipment (1) GOT Image Name Model name RS-232 RS-232 interface (Built into GOT) • For RS-232 communication RS-232 RS-232 RS-232 Communication Unit GT15-RS2-9P • For RS-232 communication RS-232 RS-422 conversion unit GT15-RS2T4-9P • For RS-422 communication RS-422/485 RS-422/485 RS-422/485 Communication Unit GT15-RS4-9S •...
  • Page 151 (3) Cable Image Name Model name RS-232 cable 1) (To be prepared by the user. Section 4.2 Connection Cable) RS-422 cable 4 - 11 4.1 System Configuration 4.1.4 Connecting to QnASCPU type...

  • Page 152: Connecting To Ancpu Type

    4.1.5 Connecting to AnCPU type Communication driver AJ71C24/UC24 System configuration and connection conditions Connection conditions System configuration Number of Distance GOTs Computer link module 15m or less RS-232 cable 2) MAX15m Computer link module 500m or less RS-422 cable MAX500m 4 - 12 4.1 System Configuration 4.1.5 Connecting to AnCPU type...

  • Page 153: System Configuration

    System equipment (1) GOT Image Name Model name RS-232 RS-232 interface (Built into GOT) • For RS-232 communication RS-232 RS-232 RS-232 Communication Unit GT15-RS2-9P • For RS-232 communication RS-232 RS-422 conversion unit GT15-RS2T4-9P • For RS-422 communication RS-422/485 RS-422/485 RS-422/485 Communication Unit GT15-RS4-9S •...

  • Page 154: Connecting To Anscpu Type

    4.1.6 Connecting to AnSCPU type Communication driver AJ71C24/UC24 System configuration and connection conditions Connection conditions System configuration Number of Distance GOTs Computer link module RS-232 cable 1) 15m or less MAX15m Computer link module RS-422 cable 500m or less MAX500m 4 - 14 4.1 System Configuration 4.1.6 Connecting to AnSCPU type...
  • Page 155 System equipment (1) GOT Image Name Model name RS-232 RS-232 interface (Built into GOT) • For RS-232 communication RS-232 RS-232 RS-232 Communication Unit GT15-RS2-9P • For RS-232 communication RS-232 RS-422 conversion unit GT15-RS2T4-9P • For RS-422 communication RS-422/485 RS-422/485 RS-422/485 Communication Unit GT15-RS4-9S •...

  • Page 156: Connecting To Motion Controller Cpu (Q Series)

    4.1.7 Connecting to motion controller CPU (Q Series) Communication driver A/QnA/QCPU,QJ71C24, MELDAS C6* A motion controller CPU (Q Series) mounted to the multiple CPU system of the QCPU (Q mode) can be monitored. The system configuration, connection conditions and system equipment when connecting the GOT to a motion controller CPU (Q Series) are the same as the case of the QCPU (Q mode).

  • Page 157: Connection Cable

    4.2 Connection Cable The RS-232 cable or RS-422 cable used for connecting the GOT to the PLC should be prepared by the user. The following provides connection diagrams for each cable, connector specifications and other information. Connection cable Model RS-232 cable RS-422 cable (See section 4.2.1) (See section 4.2.2)

  • Page 158: Connection Cable

    4.2.1 RS-232 cable The following shows the connection diagrams and connector specifications of the RS-232 cable used for connecting the GOT to a PLC. Connection diagram (1) RS-232 cable 1) (when PLC CPU side connector is D-sub 9-pin) (a) For the GT15 GOT side PLC side Cable connection and signal direction...

  • Page 159: Rs-232 Cable

    (2) RS-232 cable 2) (when PLC CPU side connector is D-sub 25-pin) (a) For the GT15 GOT side PLC side Cable connection and signal direction Signal name Pin No. Pin No. Signal name RD(RXD) SD(TXD) SD(TXD) RD(RXD) ER(DTR) RS(RTS) CS(CTS) DR(DSR) DR(DSR) RS(RTS)

  • Page 160: Precautions

    Connector specifications (1) GOT side connector Use the following as the RS-232 interface and RS-232 communication unit connector on the GOT. For the GOT side of the RS-232 cable, use a connector or connector cover applicable to the GOT connector. (a) Connector type 9-pin D-sub (male) inch screw fixed type (b) Connector model...

  • Page 161: Rs-422 Cable

    4.2.2 RS-422 cable The following shows the connection diagrams and connector specifications of the RS-422 cable used for connecting the GOT to a PLC. Connection diagram GOT side PLC side Cable connection and signal direction Signal name Pin No. Signal name Connector specifications (1) GOT side connector Use the following as the RS-422 interface and RS-422/485 communication unit connector on the...

  • Page 162: Rs-422 Cable

    Connecting terminating resistors Connect the terminating resistors (330 1/4W (orange/orange/brown/ ) ) on the serial communication module or computer link module side. No terminating resistor needs to be connected on the GOT side as one is already built into the GOT. For details, refer to the following manual: The User's Manual of the serial communication module or computer link module (1) Other than A2CCPUC24(-PRF)

  • Page 163: Checking Os Installation On Got

    4.3 Preparatory Procedures for Monitoring The following shows the procedures to be taken before monitoring and corresponding reference sections. Section 4.3.1 Install the OS on the GOT. Installing OS onto GOT Section 4.3.2 Make sure that the OS is installed on the GOT. Checking OS installation on GOT Section 4.3.3 Set the communication interface.

  • Page 164: Preparatory Procedure For Monitoring

    4.3.1 Installing OS onto GOT Install the standard monitor OS, communication driver and option OS onto the GOT. For the OS installation methods, refer to the following manual. GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual Check any of the following under the Communication driver. •...

  • Page 165: Checking Os Installation On Got

    4.3.2 Checking OS installation on GOT Check if the OS is properly installed or not on the Drive information tab of GT Designer2. For the operation on the Drive information tab, refer to the following manual. GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual The OS has been installed successfully on the GOT if the following can be confirmed: 1) Standard monitor OS...

  • Page 166: Setting Communication Interface (Communication Settings)

    4.3.3 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) Make the GOT communication interface settings on [Communication setting] of GT Designer2. Select the same communication driver as the one installed on the GOT for each communication interface. For details on [Communication setting] of GT Designer2, refer to the following manual. GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual Communication settings...

  • Page 167: Setting Communication Interface (Communication Settings)

    Communication detail settings (1) A/QnA/QCPU, QJ71C24, MELDAS C6* Item Description Range Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication with the connected equipment. 9600bps, 19200bps, <Default: 115200bps> Transmission Speed 38400bps, 57600bps, When the setting exceeds the limit of the connected 115200bps equipment, communication is performed at the fastest transmission speed supported by the connected equipment...
  • Page 168 (2) AJ71QC24 Item Description Range Set this item when change the transmission speed used for 4800bps, 9600bps, Transmission Speed communication with the connected equipment. 19200bps, 38400bps, <Default: 19200bps> 57600bps, 115200bps 4 - 28 4.3 Preparatory Procedures for Monitoring 4.3.3 Setting communication interface (Communication settings)
  • Page 169 (3) AJ71C24/UC24 Item Description Range Set this item when change the transmission speed used for 4800bps, 9600bps, Transmission Speed communication with the connected equipment. 19200bps <Default: 19200bps> (1) Communication interface setting by Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility's "Communication setting"...

  • Page 170: Downloading Project Data

    4.3.4 Downloading project data Download project data to the GOT. For how to download project data, refer to the following manual. GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual Check the necessary items and click the button. Download Download 4 - 30 4.3 Preparatory Procedures for Monitoring 4.3.4 Downloading project data...

  • Page 171: Attaching Communication Unit And Connecting Cable

    4.3.5 Attaching communication unit and connecting cable Cautions when attaching the communication unit and connecting the cable Shut off all phases of the GOT power supply before attaching the communication unit and connecting the cable. Attaching the communication unit Attach the serial communication unit to the extension unit connector on the GOT.
  • Page 172 How to connect the cable (1) How to connect the RS-232 cable (a) For the GT15 • connection to the RS-232 interface Connect the RS-232 cable to the RS-232 interface on the GOT. • connection to the RS-232 communication unit Connect the RS-232 cable to the RS-232 communication unit on the GOT.
  • Page 173 (2) How to connect the RS-422 cable (a) For the GT15 • connection to the RS-232 interface Connect the RS-422 conversion unit to the RS- 232 interface on the GOT. Connect the RS-422 cable to the RS-422 conversion unit. • connection to the RS-422/485 communication unit Connect the RS-232 cable to the RS-232 communication unit on the GOT.
  • Page 174 When using the RS-422 conversion unit On "Communication settings" on the utility, make setting so that 5V DC power is supplied to the RS-422 conversion unit from the RS-232 interface on the GOT. For details on the utility, refer to the following manual: User's Manual Touch [5V supply].

  • Page 175: Verifying Got Recognizes Connected Equipment

    4.3.6 Verifying GOT recognizes connected equipment Verify the GOT recognizes connected equipments on [Communication setting] of the Utility. • Channel number of communication interface, communication drivers allocation status • Communication unit installation status Remark How to display Utility(at default), utility call key 1-point press on GOT screen upper-left corner When using GT1595-X Utility display...
  • Page 176 After powering up the GOT, touch [Main Menu] [Communication setting] from the Utility. The [Communication setting] appears. Verify that the following communication driver name is displayed in the box for the communication interface to be used. • Communication driver (either of the following) A/QnA/QCPU, QJ71C24 AJ71QC24 AJ71C24/UC24...

  • Page 177: Checking For Normal Monitoring

    4.3.7 Checking for normal monitoring Check for errors occurring on the GOT Presetting the system alarm to project data allows you to identify errors occurred on the GOT, PLC CPU, servo amplifier and communications. For details on the system alarm, refer to the following manual. User’s Manual (When using GT15) Communication...
  • Page 178 Perform an I/O check Whether the PLC can communicate with the GOT or not can be checked by the I/O check function. If this check ends successfully, it means correct communication interface settings and proper cable connection. Display the I/O check screen by [Main Menu] [Debug &...

  • Page 179: Plc Side Setting

    4.4 PLC Side Setting The GOT operates under the following transmission specifications when it is connected to a Mitsubishi PLC in the computer link connection. Transmission specifications Setting Data bit 8 bits Parity bit Yes (Odd) Stop bit 1 bit...

  • Page 180: Connecting Serial Communication Module (Q Series)

    4.4.1 Connecting serial communication module (Q Series) Serial communication module (Q Series) For details of the serial communication module (Q Series), refer to the following manual. Q Corresponding Serial Communication Module User's Manual (Basic) [Intelligent function module switch setting] on GX Developer [The intelligent function module switch setting] on GX Developer is not necessary.
  • Page 181 (2) When connecting to the CH2 side Switch No. Description Setting Specified Position value Operation setting Data bit Parity bit Even/odd parity CH2 transmission (Operates according Stop bit setting Switch 3 to the GOT side 0000 Sum check code specifications.) Write during RUN Setting modifications...
  • Page 182 (1) When the [intelligent function module switch setting] has been set After writing PLC parameters to the PLC CPU, turn the PLC CPU OFF then back ON again, or reset the PLC CPU. (2) Connection of multiple GOTs To some serial communication module models, two GOTs can be connected using both CH1 and CH2.

  • Page 183: Connecting Serial Communication Module (Qna Series)

    4.4.2 Connecting serial communication module (QnA Series) Serial communication module (QnA Series) For details of the serial communication module (QnA Series), refer to the following manual. Serial Communication Module User's Manual (Modem Function Additional Version) Switch setting on serial communication module Set the Station number switches, the Mode switch for the channel used for GOT connection, and the Transmission specifications switches.
  • Page 184 (2) Transmission specifications setting switch Transmission specifications Setting Description Setting setting switch switch Independent SW01 Operation setting operation AJ71QC24 (N) (-R2/R4) SW02 Data bit setting 8 bits Parity bit enable/ SW03 Enable disable setting Even/odd parity SW04 setting SW05 Stop bit setting 1 bit Sum check enable/ SW06...
  • Page 185 (a) Transmission speed setting (SW09 to SW12) Set the transmission speed (SW09 to SW12) as follows. The transmission speed setting must be consistent with that of the GOT side. For how to set the GOT side transmission speed, refer to the following. Section 4.3.3 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) *1*2*3 Transmission speed...

  • Page 186: Connecting Computer Link Module

    MELSEC A1S CPU24-R2 CPU24-R2 STOP STOP L CLR L CLR RESET RESET RESET RESET ERROR ERROR MITSUBISHI MITSUBISHI PULL When the cover is open When the cover is open 4 - 46 4.4 PLC Side Setting 4.4.3 Connecting computer link module...
  • Page 187 (1) Mode setting switch Mode setting switch Description Setting RS-232 connection Dedicated protocoltype RS-422 connection (2) Transmission specifications switch (a) AJ71UC24 Transmission specifications Setting Description Setting switch switch RS-232 connection SW11 Main channel setting RS-422 connection SW12 Data bit setting 8 bits SW13 (Consistent with the...
  • Page 188 (b) A1SJ71UC24-R2, A1SJ71UC24-PRF, A1SJ71C24-R2, A1SJ71C24-PRF Transmission specifications Setting Description Setting switch switch SW03 Unused Write during RUN SW04 enabled/disabled Enabled setting SW05 (Consistent with the Transmission speed See descriptions SW06 GOT side setting below. specifications.) SW07 SW08 Data bit setting 8 bits SW09 Parity bit setting...
  • Page 189 • Transmission speed setting (SW05 to SW07) Set the transmission speed (SW05 to SW07) as follows. The transmission speed setting must be consistent with that of the GOT side. For how to set the GOT side transmission speed, refer to the following. Section 4.3.3 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) Transmission speed Setting switch...
  • Page 190 (e) A2CCPUC24, A2CCPUC24-PRF Transmission specifications Setting Description Setting switch switch SW11 (Consistent with the Transmission speed See descriptions SW12 GOT side setting below. specifications.) SW13 SW14 Data bit setting 8 bits SW15 Parity bit setting Even/odd parity SW16 setting SW17 Stop bit setting 1 bit SW18...
  • Page 191 When connecting the GT11 and the computer link unit When the GT11 and the computer link unit are connected via RS-232C, set the buffer memory in the computer link unit using the sequence program so that CD signals are not checked. Examples of the CPU units equipped with built-in computer link are explained below also.
  • Page 192 MEMO 4 - 52...

  • Page 193: List Of Functions Added By Version Upgrade

    MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 5.1 System Configuration ..page 5-2 This section describes the equipment and cables needed when connecting to MELSECNET/10 (PLC to PLC network). Select a system suitable for your application. 5.2 Preparatory Procedures for Monitoring .
  • Page 194 5.1 System Configuration Select a system configuration suitable for your application. (1) Connectable network Connect the GOT to the following network systems as an ordinary station. • MELSECNET/10 network system (PLC to PLC network) optical loop system • MELSECNET/10 network system (PLC to PLC network) coaxial bus system (2) MELSECNET/H network module When connecting the MELSECNET/H network module to the MELSECNET/10 network system, specify the MELSECNET/10 Mode as a network type.

  • Page 195: System Configuration

    5.1.1 Connecting to optical loop system Communication driver MELSECNET/10 System configuration and connection conditions Connection conditions System configuration Number of Distance GOTs MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 network module 63 (max.) Optical fiber cable The overall extension cable length and the length between stations vary depending on the cable type to be used and the total number of stations.
  • Page 196 (3) Cable Image Name Model name For the optical fiber cable, refer to the following manuals. • Q corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network) Optical fiber cable • For QnA/Q4AR MELSECNET/10 Network System Reference Manual • Type MELSECNET/10 Network System (PLC to PLC network) Reference Manual 5 - 4 5.1 System Configuration...

  • Page 197: Connecting To The Coaxial Bus System

    5.1.2 Connecting to the coaxial bus system Communication driver MELSECNET/10 System configuration and connection conditions Connection conditions System configuration Number of Distance GOTs MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 network module 31 (max.) Coaxial cable The overall extension cable length and the length between stations vary depending on the cable type to be used and the total number of stations.
  • Page 198 (3) Cable Image Name Model name For the coaxial cable, refer to the following manuals. • Q corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network) Coaxial cable • For QnA/Q4AR MELSECNET/10 Network System Reference Manual • Type MELSECNET/10 Network System (PLC to PLC network) Reference Manual 5 - 6 5.1 System Configuration...

  • Page 199: Installing Os Onto Got

    5.2 Preparatory Procedures for Monitoring The following shows the procedures to be taken before monitoring and corresponding reference sections. Section 5.2.1 Install the OS on the GOT. Installing OS onto GOT Section 5.2.2 Make sure that the OS is installed on the GOT. Checking OS installation on GOT Section 5.2.3 Set the communication interface.

  • Page 200: Installing Os Onto Got

    5.2.1 Installing OS onto GOT Install the standard monitor OS, communication driver and option OS onto the GOT. For the OS installation methods, refer to the following manual. GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual Check the following under the Communication driver. •...

  • Page 201: Checking Os Installation On Got

    5.2.2 Checking OS installation on GOT Check if the OS is properly installed or not on the Drive information tab of GT Designer2. For the operation on the Drive information tab, refer to the following manual. GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual The OS has been installed successfully on the GOT if the following can be confirmed: 1) Standard monitor OS...

  • Page 202: Setting Communication Interface (Communication Settings)

    5.2.3 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) To configure the communication interface of the GOT, use the [Communication settings] of GT Designer2 and the switches of the communication unit. Select the same communication driver as the one installed on the GOT for each communication interface. For details on [Communication Settings] of GT Designer2, refer to the following manual.
  • Page 203 Communication detail settings Item Description Range Set the number of retries to be performed when a communi- cation error occurs. Retry When receiving no response after retries, the communica- 0 to 5 Times tion times out. <Default: 3 Times> Set the time period for a communication to time out. Timeout Time 3 to 30 Sec <Default: 3 Sec>...
  • Page 204 Switch setting For details of each setting switch and LED, refer to the following manual. GT15 MELSECNET/10 communication unit User’s Manual GT15-75J71LP23-Z, GT15-75J71BR13-Z POWER D.LINK DUAL SW.E T.PASS M/S.E PRM.E GOT R/W OVER OVER AB.IF AB.IF TIME TIME DATA DATA UNDER UNDER LOOP...
  • Page 205 (4) Mode setting switch Mode setting switch Description Setting On-line MODE <Default: 0> (1) Switch setting example For the switch setting example, refer to the following. Section 5.3 PLC Side Setting (2) When the switch setting is changed When changing the switch setting after mounting the MELSECNET/10 communication unit to the GOT, reset the GOT.

  • Page 206: Downloading Project Data

    5.2.4 Downloading project data Download project data to the GOT. For how to download project data, refer to the following manual. GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual Check the necessary items and click the button. Download Download 5 - 14 5.2 Preparatory Procedures for Monitoring 5.2.4 Downloading project data...
  • Page 207 5.2.5 Attaching communication unit and connecting cable Cautions when attaching the communication unit and connecting the cable Shut off all phases of the GOT power supply before attaching the communication unit and connecting the cable. Attaching the communication unit Mount the interface converter unit to the extension unit connector of the GOT.
  • Page 208 Connecting the cable (1) Optical fiber cable (a) Optical fiber cable connection method Mount the optical fiber cable to the MELSECNET/10 communication unit. (b) Wiring diagram When connecting the adjacent stations, connect the IN with the adjacent OUT as follows. QCPU QJ71LP21-25 QCPU QJ71LP21-25 QCPU QJ71LP21-25...
  • Page 209 (b) Coaxial cable connector connection method The following describes the method for connecting the BCN connector (connector plug for coaxial cable) and the cable. CAUTION • Solder the coaxial cable connectors properly. Insufficient soldering may result in malfunctions. Components of the BNC connector Structure of the coaxial cable External conductor Outer sheath...
  • Page 210 Insert the connector assembly shown in into the plug shell and screw the nut into the plug shell. Precautions for soldering Note the following precautions when soldering the internal conductor and contact. • Make sure that the solder does not bead up at the soldered section. •...
  • Page 211 5.2.6 Verifying GOT recognizes connected equipment Verify the GOT recognizes connected equipments on [Communication setting] of the Utility. • Channel number of communication interface, communication drivers allocation status • Communication unit installation status Remark How to display Utility(at default), utility call key 1-point press on GOT screen upper-left corner When using GT1595-X Utility display...
  • Page 212 After powering up the GOT, touch [Main Menu] [Communication setting] from the Utility. The [Communication setting] appears. Verify that the following communication driver name is displayed in the box for the communication interface to be used. • Communication driver: MELSECNET/10 When the communication driver name is not displayed normally, carry out the following procedure again.
  • Page 213 5.2.7 Checking for normal monitoring Check for errors occurring on the GOT Presetting the system alarm to project data allows you to identify errors occurred on the GOT, PLC CPU, servo amplifier and communications. For details on the system alarm, refer to the following manual. User’s Manual (When using GT15) Communication...
  • Page 214 Checking the wiring state (for optical loop system only) Check if the optical fiber cable is connected correctly in [Loop test] of GX Developer. For the GX Developer operation method, refer to the following manual. Q corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network) (1) Check the [Receive direction error].
  • Page 215 Checking if the GOT is performed the data link correctly Check if the GOT is performed the data link correctly in [Other station info.]. For the GX Developer operation method, refer to the following manual. Q corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network) (1) Check [Communication status of each station] and [Data-Link status of each station].

  • Page 216: Connecting To Melsecnet/H Network Module

    5.3 PLC Side Setting Model name Reference QJ71LP21, QJ71LP21-25, MELSECNET/H network module Section 5.3.1 QJ71LP21S-25, QJ71BR11 AJ71QLP21, AJ71QLP21S, MELSECNET/10 network module (QnA Series) AJ71QBR11, A1SJ71QLP21, Section 5.3.2 A1SJ71QLP21S, A1SJ71QBR11 AJ71LP21, AJ71BR11, A1SJ71LP21, MELSECNET/10 network module (A Series) Section 5.3.3 A1SJ71BR11 5.3.1 Connecting to MELSECNET/H network module This section describes the settings of the GOT and MELSECNET/H network module in the case of system...
  • Page 217 Switch setting of MELSECNET/H network module Set the station number setting switch and mode setting switch. QJ71LP21, QJ71LP21-25 QJ71LP21S-25 QJ71BR11 QJ71LP21-25 QJ71LP21S-25 QJ71BR11 T.PASS D.LINK EXT.PW T.PASS D.LINK D.LINK T.PASS ERR. L ERR. ERR. L ERR. L ERR. ERR. STATION NO. STATION NO.
  • Page 218 [Network parameter] of GX Developer (1) Network parameter Setting necessity at GOT Item Setting connection Network type MNET/10 mode (Control station) (fixed) Starting I/O No. 0000 Network No. Total stations Group No. 0 (fixed) Mode Online (fixed) Network range assignment Refer to (2) Refresh parameters Interrupt settings...
  • Page 219 (2) Network range assignment Setting necessity at GOT Item Setting connection Monitoring time Start 0000 Station Send range No.1 00FF for station Start 0100 Station (LB) No.2 01FF Start 0000 LB/LW setting Station Send range No.1 00FF for station Start 0100 Station (LW)
  • Page 220 [Communication settings] of GT Designer2 Item Setting (Use default value.) Retry 3 Times Timeout Time 3 Sec [Communication Settings] of GT Designer2 For the setting method of [Communication Settings] of GT Designer2, refer to the following. Section 5.2.3 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) Setting of the MELSECNET/10 communication unit Item Setting...

  • Page 221: Connecting To Melsecnet/10 Network Module (Qna Series)

    5.3.2 Connecting to MELSECNET/10 network module (QnA Series) This section describes the settings of the GOT and MELSECNET/10 network module (QnA series) in the case of system configuration shown as In this section, the network parameter (common parameter) of GX Developer is taken as an exmaple to pro- vide explanations.
  • Page 222 Switch setting of MELSECNET/10 network module Set for each setting switch. AJ71QLP21 AJ71QLP21S AJ71QBR11 J71QLP21 J71QLP21S J71QBR11 RUN - - POWER RUN - - POWER RUN - - POWER PC - - MNG PC - - MNG PC - - MNG REMOTE - - S.MNG REMOTE -...
  • Page 223 (1) Network number setting switch Setting necessity at GOT Network number setting switch Description Setting connection NETWORK NO. X100 Network No. setting (Network No.1) : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary Specify the same network number as that of the GOT. (2) Group number setting switch Setting necessity at GOT Group number setting switch...
  • Page 224 (5) Mode setting switch Setting necessity at GOT Mode setting switch Description Setting connection MODE Mode setting 0 (fixed) 0 : ONLINE(A.R) (Online) 2 : OFFLINE : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary (6) Condition setting switches Setting Setting necessity at GOT Condition setting switches Description Setting...
  • Page 225 [Network parameter] of GX Developer (1) Network parameter Setting necessity at GOT Item Setting connection Network type MNET/10 (Controlling station) (fixed) Start I/O No. 0000 Network No. Total stations Network range assignment Refer to (2) Refresh parameters (Use default value) Interlink transmission parameters Routing parameters : Necessary...
  • Page 226 (2) Network range assignment Setting necessity at GOT Item Setting connection Monitoring time Start 0000 Station Send No.1 00FF range for station Start 0100 Station No.2 01FF BW setting Start 0000 Station Send No.1 00FF range for station Start 0100 Station No.2 01FF...
  • Page 227 [Communication settings] of GT Designer2 Item Setting (Use default value.) Retry 3 Times Timeout Time 3 Sec [Communication Settings] of GT Designer2 For the setting method of [Communication Settings] of GT Designer2, refer to the following. Section 5.2.3 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) Setting of the MELSECNET/10 communication unit Item Setting...

  • Page 228: Connecting To Melsecnet/10 Network Module (A Series)

    5.3.3 Connecting to MELSECNET/10 network module (A Series) This section describes the settings of the GOT and MELSECNET/10 network module (A Series) in the case of system configuration shown as In this section, the network parameter (common parameter) of GX Developer is taken as an exmaple to provide explanations.
  • Page 229 Switch setting of MELSECNET/10 network module Set for each setting switch. AJ71LP21 AJ71BR11 J71LP21 J71BR11 RUN - - POWER RUN - - POWER PC - - MNG PC - - MNG REMOTE - - S.MNG REMOTE - - S.MNG DUAL - - D.LINK - D.LINK SW.E -...
  • Page 230 (1) Network number setting switch Setting necessity at GOT Network number setting switch Description Setting connection NETWORK NO. X100 Network No. setting *1 *2 (Network No.1) : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary Specify the same network No. as that of the GOT. Do not specify a number between 240 and 255.
  • Page 231 (5) Mode setting switch Setting necessity at GOT Mode setting switch Description Setting connection MODE Mode setting 0 (fixed) 0:ONLINE(A.R) (Online) 2:OFFLINE : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary (6) Condition setting switches Setting Setting necessity at GOT Condition setting switches Description Setting switch...
  • Page 232 [Network parameter] of GX Developer (1) Network parameter Setting necessity at GOT Item Setting connection Network type MNET/10 (Controlling station) (fixed) Start I/O No. 0000 Network No. Total stations Network range assignment Refer to (2) Refresh parameters (Use default value) Interlink transmission parameters Routing parameters : Necessary...
  • Page 233 (2) Network range assignment Setting necessity at GOT Item Setting connection Monitoring time Start 0000 Send Station range for No.1 00FF each Start 0100 Station station No.2 (LB) 01FF LB/LW settings Start 0000 Send Station range for No.1 00FF each Start 0100 Station...
  • Page 234 [Communication settings] of GT Designer2 Item Setting (Use default value.) Retry 3 Times Timeout Time 3 Sec [Communication Settings] of GT Designer2 For the setting method of [Communication Settings] of GT Designer2, refer to the following. Section 5.2.3 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) Setting of the MELSECNET/10 communication unit Item Setting...
  • Page 235 5.4 Precautions Network configuration Use MELSECNET/10 (PLC to PLC network) to configure a network including the GOT. The following networks including the GOT cannot be configured. • MELSECNET/10 (Remote I/O network) • MELSECNET/H (PLC to PLC network: MELSECNET/H Mode, MELSECNET/H Extended Mode) •...
  • Page 236 5.5 List of Functions Added by Version Upgrade The following describes the function added by version upgrade of GT Designer2 or OS. For using the function below, use the GT Designer2 or OS of the stated version or later. Version of GT Item Description Version of OS...
  • Page 237 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 6.1 System Configuration ..page 6-2 This section describes the equipment and cables needed for CC-Link connection (intelligent device station). Select a system suitable for your application. 6.2 Preparatory Procedures for Monitoring .

  • Page 238: System Configuration

    6.1 System Configuration Select a system configuration suitable for your application. Conventions used in this section Numbers (e.g. ) of System configuration and connection conditions correspond to the numbers (e.g. ) of System equipment. Use these numbers as references when confirming models and applications. Communication driver CC-Link (ID) System configuration and connection conditions...

  • Page 239: System Configuration

    System equipment (1) GOT Image Name Model name CC-Link CC-Link CC-Link comunication unit (Intelligent) (Intelligent) GT15-75J61BT13-Z • Intelligent device station (2) PLC Image Name Model name QJ61BT11, QJ61BT11N AJ61QBT11 , A1SJ61QBT11 CC-Link module AJ61BT11 , A1SJ61BT11 For the system configuration of the CC-Link module, refer to the following manuals. •...

  • Page 240: Preparatory Procedures For Monitoring

    6.2 Preparatory Procedures for Monitoring The following the procedures to be taken before monitoring and corresponding reference sections. Section 6.2.1 Install the OS onto the GOT. Installing OS onto GOT Section 6.2.2 Make sure that the OS is installed on the GOT. Checking OS installation on GOT Section 6.2.3 Set the communication interface.

  • Page 241: Installing Os Onto Got

    6.2.1 Installing OS onto GOT Install the standard monitor OS, communication driver and option OS onto the GOT. For the OS installation methods, refer to the following manual. GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual Check the following under the Communication driver. •...

  • Page 242: Preparatory Procedures For Monitoring

    6.2.2 Checking OS installation on GOT Check if the OS is properly installed or not on the Drive information tab of GT Designer2. For the operation on the Drive information tab, refer to the following manual. GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual The OS has been installed successfully on the GOT if the following can be confirmed: 1) Standard monitor OS...

  • Page 243: Setting Communication Interface (Communication Settings)

    6.2.3 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) To set the communication interface of the GOT, use the [Communication settings] of GT Designer2 and the switches of the communication unit. Select the same communication driver as the one installed on the GOT for each communication interface. For details on [Communication Settings] of GT Designer2, refer to the following manual.
  • Page 244 Communication detail settings Item Description Range Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication error occurs. Retry When receiving no response after retries, the communication times 0 to 5 Times out. <Default: 3 Times> Set the time period for a communication to time out. Timeout Time 3 to 30 Sec <Default: 3 Sec>...

  • Page 245: Setting Communication Interface (Communication Settings)

    Switch setting For details of each setting switch and LED, refer to the following manual. GT15 CC-Link communication unit User’s Manual GT15-75J61BT13-Z Left side Front side L RUN MODE L ERR. STATION NO. BAUDRATE HOLD CLEAR SLD (FG1) NC (1) Mode setting switch Mode setting switch Description Setting...
  • Page 246 (4) Condition setting switches Condition setting switches Setting switch Description Setting Specify input data status of the data link error station. OFF: Cleared <Default: OFF> ON: Held Specify the number of stations occupied. OFF: 1 station <Default: OFF> ON: 4 stations (1) Switch setting example For the switch setting example, refer to the following.

  • Page 247: Downloading Project Data

    6.2.4 Downloading project data Download project data to the GOT. For how to download project data, refer to the following manual. GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual Check the necessary items and click the button. Download Download 6 - 11 6.2 Preparatory Procedures for Monitoring 6.2.4 Downloading project data...

  • Page 248: Attaching Communication Unit And Connecting Cable

    6.2.5 Attaching communication unit and connecting cable Cautions when attaching the communication unit and connecting the cable Shut off all phases of the GOT power supply before attaching the communication unit and connecting the cable. Attaching the communication unit Mount the interface converter unit to the extension unit connector of the GOT.

  • Page 249: Attaching Communication Unit And Connecting Cable

    Connecting the cable CAUTION Always ground the FG terminal of the GOT power supply and the FG1 terminal of this unit to the protective ground conductor. Be sure to ground the GOT and this unit separately. Failure to do so may cause an electric shock or malfunctions. Use applicable solderless terminals and tighten them with the specified torque.

  • Page 250: Verifying Got Recognizes Connected Equipment

    6.2.6 Verifying GOT recognizes connected equipment Verify the GOT recognizes connected equipments on [Communication setting] of the Utility. • Channel number of communication interface, communication drivers allocation status • Communication unit installation status Remark How to display Utility(at default), utility call key 1-point press on GOT screen upper-left corner When using GT1595-X Utility display...

  • Page 251: Verifying Got Recognizes Connected Equipment

    After powering up the GOT, touch [Main Menu] [Communication setting] from the Utility. The [Communication setting] appears. Verify that the following communication driver name is displayed in the box for the communication interface to be used. • Communication driver: CC-Link (ID) When the communication driver name is not displayed normally, carry out the following procedure again.

  • Page 252: Checking For Normal Monitoring

    6.2.7 Checking for normal monitoring Check for errors occurring on the GOT Presetting the system alarm to project data allows you to identify errors occurred on the GOT, PLC CPU, servo amplifier and communications. For details on the system alarm, refer to the following manual. User’s Manual (When using GT15) Communication...

  • Page 253: Checking For Normal Monitoring

    Confirming the PLC side setting When connecting the GOT, setting is required for the PLC side. Confirm if the PLC side setting is correct. Section 6.3 PLC Side Setting 6 - 17 6.2 Preparatory Procedures for Monitoring 6.2.7 Checking for normal monitoring...
  • Page 254 Checking if the GOT is correctly performed the data link Use [Monitoring other station] of the GX Developer to check if the GOT is correctly performed the data link. For the GX Developer operation method, refer to the following manual. CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual QJ61BT11N (1) Checking the [Status] (The display example on the GX Developer Version 8) Startup procedure...

  • Page 255: Plc Side Settings

    6.3 PLC Side Setting The GOT operates as the stations of which are shown below in the CC-Link system. Station data Description Station type Intelligent device station or Ver. 1 intelligent device station Number of stations occupied Station 1 or Station 4 The switch settings and parameter settings of the PLC side (CC-Link module) are described in Section 6.3.1 to Section 6.3.3.

  • Page 256: Plc Side Setting

    6.3.1 Connecting to CC-Link module (Q Series) This section describes the settings of the GOT and CC-Link module (Q Series) in the case of system configuration shown as CC-Link module (Q Series) For details of the CC-Link module (Q Series), refer to the following manual. CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual QJ61BT11N System configuration [Communication settings] of GT Designer 2...
  • Page 257 Switch setting of CC-Link module (Q Series) Set the station number setting switch, transmission speed / mode setting switch. QJ61BT11, QJ61BT11N QJ61BT11N L RUN S MST ERR. L ERR. STATION MODE (FG) (1) Station number setting switch Station number setting switch Description Setting Setting necessity at GOT connection...
  • Page 258 [Network parameter] of GX Developer (1) Network parameter Setting necessity at GOT Item Setting connection No. of boards in module Start I/O No. 0000 Operational setting (Use default value.) Type Master station (fixed) Mode Remote net (Ver.1 mode) All connect count Remote input (RX) X400 Remote output (RY)
  • Page 259 (2) Station information setting Setting necessity at GOT Setting Item connection Intelligent device station (fixed) Station type Exclusive station 1 Exclusive station count Reserve/invalid station select No setting Intelligent buffer select (word) (Use default value.) : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary When the [Mode] of the CC-Link module is set at [Remote net - (Ver.
  • Page 260 [Communication Settings] of GT Designer2 Item Setting (Use default value.) Retry 3 Times Timeout Time 3 Sec [Communication Settings] of GT Designer2 For the setting method of [Communication Settings] of GT Designer2, refer to the following. Section 6.2.3 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) Setting of the CC-Link communication unit Item Setting...
  • Page 261 6.3.2 Connecting to CC-Link module (QnA Series) This section describes the settings of the GOT and CC-Link module (QnA Series) in the case of system configuration shown as CC-Link module (QnA Series) For details of the CC-Link module (QnA Series), refer to the following manual. Control &...
  • Page 262 Switch settings of CC-Link module (QnA Series) Set for each setting switch. AJ61QBT11 A1SJ61QBT11 1SJ61QBT11 J61QBT11 ERR. M / S 156K ERR. 625K 2. 5M S MST TIME S MST LOCAL LINE LOCAL CPU R / W CPU R / W L RUN M / S TEST...
  • Page 263 (3) Transmission speed setting Transmission speed setting Description Setting Setting necessity at GOT connection Transmission speed setting B RATE (156kbps) 0 156K 1 625K 2 2. 5M 3 5M 4 10M : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary Specify the same transmission speed as that of the GOT. (4) Condition setting switches Condition setting Setting switch...
  • Page 264 Parameter setting There are two methods for the parameter setting: perform the setting from [Network parameter] of GX Developer and the sequence program. Performing it from the [Network parameter] of the GX Developer can be set only when the PLC CPU and the CC-Link module use the function version B or later.
  • Page 265 (b) Station information setting Setting necessity at GOT Item Setting connection Station type Intelligent device station (fixed) Exclusive station 1 Exclusive station count Reserve/invalid station select No setting Intelligent buffer select (word) (Use default value.) : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary Specify the same number of occupied stations as that of the GOT.
  • Page 266 (2) Setting from sequence program The parameter is written to the buffer memory, and the data link is automatically started when PLC CPU status changes from STOP to RUN. (a) CC-Link module I/O signal Control & Communication Link System Master/Local Module Type AJ61QBT11/ A1SJ61QBT11 User's Manual (b) Device used by user Device...
  • Page 267 (d) Example of sequence program Parameter setting Module error Module ready Number of connected modules (1 module) Number of retry (3 times) Number of automatic return stations (1 station) Operation specification in the case of CPU failure (Stop) Reserved station specification (No specification) Error invalid station...
  • Page 268 [Communication Settings] of GT Designer2 Item Setting (Use default value.) Retry 3 Times Timeout Time 3 Sec [Communication Settings] of GT Designer2 For the setting method of [Communication Settings] of GT Designer2, refer to the following. Section 6.2.3 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) Setting of the CC-Link communication unit Item Setting...
  • Page 269 6.3.3 Connecting to CC-Link module (A Series) This section describes the settings of the GOT and CC-Link module (A Series) in the case of system configuration shown as CC-Link module (A Series) For details of the CC-Link module (A Series), refer to the following manual. Control &...
  • Page 270 Settings of CC-Link module (A Series) Set for each setting switch. AJ61BT11 A1SJ61BT11 1SJ61BT11 J61BT11 ERR. M / S 156K ERR. 625K 2. 5M S MST TIME S MST LOCAL LINE LOCAL CPU R / W CPU R / W L RUN M / S TEST...
  • Page 271 (3) Transmission speed setting switch Transmission speed setting switch Description Setting Setting necessity at GOT connection Transmission speed setting B RATE (156kbps) 0 156K 1 625K 2 2. 5M 3 5M 4 10M : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary Specify the same transmission speed as that of the GOT.
  • Page 272 Sequence program The parameter setting and the sequence program of the data link startup request is required. (1) Programming condition (with CC-Link dedicated instructions) The program sets the network parameter and automatic refresh parameter when PLC CPU status changes from STOP to RUN, and automatically starts the data link with CC-Link dedicated instructions.
  • Page 273 (c) Example of sequence program (CC-Link dedicated instruction) * Setting of network parameter with dedicated RLPA instruction Module error Module ready Synchronous mode (Invalid) Number of connected modules (1 module) Station data (intelligent device station, exclusive station 1, station No.1) Send buffer size (64 words) Receive buffer size...
  • Page 274 Head No. of RX (RX0) RX refresh destination (X) RX refresh destination device head No. (400) No. of refresh points (32) RY head number (RY0) RY refresh destination (Y) RY refresh destination device head No. (400) No. of refresh points (32) RW head No.
  • Page 275 (2) Program condition (for FROM/TO instruction) This program writes parameters to the buffer memory when PLC CPU status changes from STOP to RUN and automatically starts the data link with FROM/TO instruction. (a) I/O signal of CC-Link module Control & Communication Link System Master/Local Module Type AJ61BT11/ A1SJ61BT11 User's Manual (b) Devices used by user Device...
  • Page 276 (d) Example of sequence program (FROM/TO instruction) * Parameter setting Module error Module ready Number of connected modules (1 module) Number of retry (3 times) Number of automatic return stations (1 station) Operation specification in the case of CPU failure (Stop) Reserved station specification...
  • Page 277 [Communication Settings] of GT Designer2 Item Setting (Use default value.) Retry 3 Times Timeout Time 3 Sec [Communication Settings] of GT Designer2 For the setting method of [Communication Settings] of GT Designer2, refer to the following. Section 6.2.3 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) Setting of the CC-Link communication unit Item Setting...
  • Page 278 6.4 Precautions Using cyclic transmission (1) I/O signal for master station Do not turn on the reserved output signals in the output signals (remote output: RY) to the GOT from the master station. When the reserved output signal is turned on, the PLC system may be malfunctioned. For the assignment of I/O signals in the GOT, refer to the following manual.

  • Page 279: List Of Functions Added By Version Upgrade

    6.5 List of Functions Added by Version Upgrade The following describes the function added by version upgrade of GT Designer2 or OS. For using the function below, use the GT Designer2 or OS of the stated version or later. Version of GT Item Description Version of OS...
  • Page 280 MEMO 6 - 44...
  • Page 281 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 7.1 System Configuration ..page 7-2 This section describes the equipment and cables needed for CC-Link connection (via G4). Select a system suitable for your application. 7.2 Preparatory Procedures for Monitoring ..

  • Page 282: Connecting To Qcpu (Q Mode)

    7.1 System Configuration Select a system configuration suitable for your application. (1) PLC CPU QCPU (Q mode) that can be monitored in CC-Link (via G4) can be monitored. QnACPU, ACPU or QCPU (A mode) cannot be monitored. (2) Conventions used in this section Numbers (e.g.

  • Page 283: System Configuration

    System equipment (1) GOT Image Name Model name RS-232 RS-422 conversion unit GT15-RS2T4-9P • For RS-422 communication RS-422/485 RS-422/485 RS-422/485 Communication Unit GT15-RS4-9S • For RS-422 communication RS-422 RS-422 interface (Built into GOT) • For RS-422 communication Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). (2) PLC Image Name...

  • Page 284: Connecting To Motion Controller Cpu (Q Series)

    7.1.2 Connecting to motion controller CPU (Q Series) Communication driver CC-Link (G4) A motion controller CPU (Q Series) mounted to the multiple CPU system of the QCPU (Q mode) can be monitored. The system configuration, connection conditions and system equipment when connecting the GOT to a motion controller CPU (Q Series) are the same as the case of the QCPU (Q mode).

  • Page 285: Preparatory Procedures For Monitoring

    7.2 Preparatory Procedures for Monitoring The following shows the procedures to be taken before monitoring and corresponding reference sections. Section 7.2.1 Install the OS onto the GOT. Installing OS onto GOT Section 7.2.2 Make sure that the OS is installed on the GOT. Checking OS installation on GOT Section 7.2.3 Set the communication interface.

  • Page 286: Installing Os Onto Got

    7.2.1 Installing OS onto GOT Install the standard monitor OS, communication driver and option OS onto the GOT. For the OS installation methods, refer to the following manual. GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual Check the following under the Communication driver. CC-Link (G4) Check-mark a desired standard monitor OS, communication driver, option OS, and extended function OS, and click the...

  • Page 287: Checking Os Installation On Got

    7.2.2 Checking OS installation on GOT Check if the OS is properly installed or not on the Drive information tab of GT Designer2. For the operation on the Drive information tab, refer to the following manual. GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual The OS has been installed successfully on the GOT if the following can be confirmed: 1) Standard monitor OS...

  • Page 288: Setting Communication Interface (Communication Settings)

    7.2.3 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) Make the GOT communication interface settings on [Communication setting] of GT Designer2. Select the same communication driver as the one installed on the GOT for each communication interface. For details on [Communication setting] of GT Designer2, refer to the following manual. GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual Communication settings...
  • Page 289 Communication detail settings Item Description Range Set this item when change the transmission speed used for 9600bps, 19200bps, Transmission Speed communication with the connected equipment. 38400bps <Default: 9600bps> (1) Communication interface setting by Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility's "Communication setting"...

  • Page 290: Downloading Project Data

    7.2.4 Downloading project data Download project data to the GOT. For how to download project data, refer to the following manual. GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual Check the necessary items and click the button. Download Download 7 - 10 7.2 Preparatory Procedures for Monitoring 7.2.4 Downloading project data...

  • Page 291: Attaching Communication Unit And Connecting Cable

    7.2.5 Attaching communication unit and connecting cable Cautions when attaching the communication unit and connecting the cable Shut off all phases of the GOT power supply before attaching the communication unit and connecting the cable. Attaching the communication unit Attach the serial communication unit to the extension unit connector on the GOT.
  • Page 292 • connection to the RS-422/485 communication unit Connect the RS-232 cable to the RS-232 communication unit on the GOT. RS-422 conversion unit For details of the RS-422 conversion unit, refer to the following manual. GT15 RS-422 Conversion Unit User's Manual 7 - 12 7.2 Preparatory Procedures for Monitoring 7.2.5 Attaching communication unit and connecting cable...
  • Page 293 When using the RS-422 conversion unit On "Communication settings" on the utility, make setting so that 5V DC power is supplied to the RS-422 conversion unit from the RS-232 interface on the GOT. For details on the utility, refer to the following manual: User's Manual Touch [5V supply].

  • Page 294: Verifying Got Recognizes Connected Equipment

    7.2.6 Verifying GOT recognizes connected equipment Verify the GOT recognizes connected equipments on [Communication setting] of the Utility. • Channel number of communication interface, communication drivers allocation status • Communication unit installation status Remark How to display Utility(at default), utility call key 1-point press on GOT screen upper-left corner When using GT1595-X Utility display...
  • Page 295 The [Communication setting] appears. Verify that the following communication driver name is displayed in the box for the communication interface to be used. • Communication driver: CC-Link(G4) When the communication driver name is not displayed normally, carry out the following procedure again. •...

  • Page 296: Checking For Normal Monitoring

    7.2.7 Checking for normal monitoring Check for errors occurring on the GOT Presetting the system alarm to project data allows you to identify errors occurred on the GOT, PLC CPU, servo amplifier and communications. For details on the system alarm, refer to the following manual. User’s Manual (When using GT15) Communication...
  • Page 297 Perform an I/O check Whether the PLC can communicate with the GOT or not can be checked by the I/O check function. If this check ends successfully, it means correct communication interface settings and proper cable connection. Display the I/O check screen by [Main Menu] [Debug &...
  • Page 298 7.3 PLC Side Settings This section describes the settings of the GOT and peripheral connection module in the case of the system configuration shown as (1) Peripheral connection module For details of the peripheral connection module, refer to the following manual. Peripheral Connection Module Type AJ65BT-G4-S3 User's Manual (detail volume) (2) CC-Link module (Q Series)
  • Page 299 Switch setting of peripheral connection module Set the station number setting switch, data link transmission speed setting switch, and operation setting DIP switch. B RATE STATION NO. MITSUBISHI J65BT-G4-S3 x 10 L RUN RESET 2 3 4 5 6 7 MODE L ERR.
  • Page 300 Switch setting of CC-Link module (Q series) Set the station number setting switch, transmission speed / mode setting switch. QJ61BT11, QJ61BT11N QJ61BT11N L RUN S MST ERR. L ERR. STATION MODE (FG) (1) Station number setting switch Station number setting switch Description Setting Setting necessity at GOT connection...
  • Page 301 [Network parameter] of GX Developer (1) Network parameter Setting necessity at GOT Item Setting connection No. of boards in module Start I/O No. 0000 Operational setting (Use default value.) Type Master station (fixed) Mode Remote net (Ver.1 mode) All connect count Remote input (RX) X400 Remote output (RY)
  • Page 302 (2) Station information setting Setting necessity at GOT Setting Item connection Intelligent device station (fixed) Station type Exclusive station count Exclusive station 1 (fixed) Reserve/invalid station select No setting Intelligent buffer select (word) (Use default value.) : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary When the [Mode] of the CC-Link module is set at [Remote net - (Ver.
  • Page 303 7.4 List of Functions Added by Version Upgrade The following describes the function added by version upgrade of GT Designer2 or OS. For using the function below, use the GT Designer2 or OS of the stated version or later. Version of GT Item Description Version of OS...
  • Page 304 MEMO 7 - 24...

  • Page 305: Precautions

    ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.1 System Configuration ..page 8-2 This section describes the equipment and cables needed when connecting to Ethernet. Select a system suitable for your application. 8.2 Preparatory Procedures for Monitoring ..
  • Page 306 8.1 System Configuration Select a system configuration suitable for your application. Conventions used in this section Numbers (e.g. ) of System configuration and connection conditions correspond to the numbers (e.g. ) of System equipment. Use these numbers as references when confirming models and applications. Communication driver QJ71E71/AJ71(Q)E71 System configuration and connection conditions...
  • Page 307 System equipment (1) GOT Image Name Model name Ethernet Ethernet communication unit GT15-J71E71-100 • For Ethernet communication (2) PLC Image Name Model name Ethernet module QJ71E71-100, QJ71E71-B5, QJ71E71-B2, *1 *2 QJ71E71 (Q Series) AJ71QE71N3-T, AJ71QE71N-B5, AJ71QE71N-B2, AJ71QE71N-T, AJ71QE71N-B5T, Ethernet module AJ71QE71, AJ71QE71-B5, *1 *2...
  • Page 308 8.2 Preparatory Procedures for Monitoring The following shows the procedures to be taken before monitoring and corresponding reference sections. Section 8.2.1 Install the OS onto the GOT. Installing OS onto GOT Section 8.2.2 Make sure that the OS is installed on the GOT. Checking OS installation on GOT Section 8.2.3 Set the communication interface.
  • Page 309 8.2.1 Installing OS onto GOT Install the standard monitor OS, communication driver and option OS onto the GOT. For the OS installation methods, refer to the following manual. GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual Check the following under the Communication driver. •...
  • Page 310 8.2.2 Checking OS installation on GOT Check if the OS is properly installed or not on the Drive information tab of GT Designer2. For the operation on the Drive information tab, refer to the following manual. GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual The OS has been installed successfully on the GOT if the following can be confirmed: 1) Standard monitor OS...
  • Page 311 8.2.3 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) Make the GOT communication interface settings on [Communication setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer2. Select the same communication driver as the one installed on the GOT for each communication interface. For details on [Communication setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer2, refer to the following manual. GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual Communication settings...
  • Page 312 Communication detail settings Item Description Range Set the network No. of the GOT. GOT NET No. 1 to 239 <Default: 1> Set the station No. of the GOT. GOT PC No. 1 to 64 <Default: 1> Set the IP address of the GOT. GOT IP Address 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 <Default: 192.168.0.18>...
  • Page 313 (from previous page) Item Description Range Set the delay time for reducing the load of the network/destination Delay Time PLC. 0 to 10000 ( 10 ms) <Default: 0ms> To connect the GOT with the Ethernet module (Q Series) in the one-on-one relationship using a cross cable, set [Timeout Time] to 6 sec.

  • Page 314: System Configuration Examples

    Ethernet setting (1) Ethernet setting Item Description Range The host is displayed. Host (The host is indicated with an asterisk (*).) Set the network No. of the connected Ethernet module. N/W No. 1 to 239 <Default: blank> Set the station No. of the connected Ethernet module. PLC No.
  • Page 315 (1) Communication interface setting by Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility's "Communication setting" after downloading "Communication setting" of project data. For details on the Utility, refer to the following manual. User's Manual (2) Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer or the Utility, the latest setting is effective.
  • Page 316 8.2.4 Downloading project data Download project data to the GOT. For how to download project data, refer to the following manual. GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual Check the necessary items and click the button. Download Download 8 - 12 8.2 Preparatory Procedures for Monitoring 8.2.4 Downloading project data...
  • Page 317 8.2.5 Attaching communication unit and connecting cable Cautions when attaching the communication unit and connecting the cable Shut off all phases of the GOT power supply before attaching the communication unit and connecting the cable. Attaching the communication unit Attach the Ethernet communication unit to the extension unit connector on the GOT.
  • Page 318 8.2.6 Verifying GOT recognizes connected equipment Verify the GOT recognizes connected equipments on [Communication setting] of the Utility. • Channel number of communication interface, communication drivers allocation status • Communication unit installation status Remark How to display Utility(at default), utility call key 1-point press on GOT screen upper-left corner When using GT1595-X Utility display...
  • Page 319 The [Communication setting] appears. Verify that the following communication driver name is displayed in the box for the communication interface to be used. • Communication driver : E71 Connection When the communication driver name is not displayed normally, carry out the following procedure again.
  • Page 320 8.2.7 Checking for normal monitoring Check for errors occurring on the GOT Presetting the system alarm to project data allows you to identify errors occurred on the GOT, PLC CPU, servo amplifier and communications. For details on the system alarm, refer to the following manual. User’s Manual (When using GT15) Communication...
  • Page 321 Confirming the communication state of GOT (1) When using the Command Prompt of Windows Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of Windows . (a) When normal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.0.18 Reply from 192.168.0.18: bytes=32 time<1ms TTL=64 (b) When abnormal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.0.18 Request timed out.
  • Page 322 Confirming the PLC side setting When connecting the GOT, setting is required for the PLC side. Confirm if the PLC side setting is correct. Section 8.3 PLC Side Setting Confirming the communication state to each station (station monitoring function) The station monitoring function detects the faults (communication timeout) of the stations monitored by the GOT.
  • Page 323 (b) Faulty station information (GS231 to GS238) • The bit of the Ethernet setting No. corresponding to the faulty station is set. 0: Normal 1: Abnormal • The bit is reset after the fault is recovered. GS231 bit 0 GS231 bit 1 GS231 bit 2 GS231 bit 3 Ethernet setting No.

  • Page 324: Connecting To Ethernet Module (Q Series)

    8.3 PLC Side Setting Model Reference Ethernet module (Q Series) QJ71E71-100, QJ71E71-B5, QJ71E71-B2, QJ71E71 Section 8.3.1 AJ71QE71N3-T, AJ71QE71N-B5, AJ71QE71N-B2, AJ71QE71N-T, AJ71QE71N-B5T, AJ71QE71, AJ71QE71-B5, Ethernet module (QnA Series) Section 8.3.2 A1SJ71QE71N3-T, A1SJ71QE71N-B5, A1SJ71QE71N-B2, A1SJ71QE71N-T, A1SJ71QE71N-B5T, A1SJ71QE71-B5, A1SJ71QE71-B2 AJ71E71N3-T, AJ71E71N-B5, AJ71E71N-B2, AJ71E71N-T, AJ71E71N-B5T, AJ71E71-S3, Ethernet module (A Series) A1SJ71E71N3-T, A1SJ71E71N-B5, A1SJ71E71N-B2, Section 8.3.3...
  • Page 325 [Network parameter] of GX Developer (1) Network parameter Setting necessity at GOT Item Setting connection Network type Ethernet (fixed) Starting I/O No. 0000 Network No. Group No. 0 (fixed) Station No.* Mode Online (fixed) Operational settings Refer to (2). Initial settings Open settings Router relay parameter Station No.
  • Page 326 (2) Operational settings Setting necessity at GOT Item Setting connection (Use default value.) Communication date code IP address 192.168.0.19 Initial timing Send frame setting (Use default value.) Enable Write at RUN time TCP Existence confirmation setting : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary Because port No.
  • Page 327 [Communication settings] and [Ethernet setting] of GT Designer2 (1) Communication settings Item Setting(Use default value.) GOT NET No. GOT PC No. GOT IP Address 192.168.0.18 GOT Port No. (QJ71E71/AJ71(Q)E71) 5001 GOT Port No. (Ethernet Download) 5014 Default Gateway 0.0.0.0 Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 Retry 3 Times...
  • Page 328 Confirming the communication state of Ethernet module (1) When using the Command Prompt of Windows Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of Windows . (a) When normal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.0.19 Reply from 192.168.0.19: bytes=32 time<1ms TTL=64 (b) When abnormal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.0.19 Request timed out.

  • Page 329: Connecting To Ethernet Module (Qna Series)

    8.3.2 Connecting to Ethernet module (QnA Series) This section describes the settings of the GOT and Ethernet module (Q Series) given for the system configuration shown at Ethernet module (QnA Series) For details of the Ethernet module (QnA Series), refer to the following manual. For QnA Ethernet Interface Module User’s Manual System configuration [Communication settings] and [Ethernet setting] of GT...
  • Page 330 Switch settings of Ethernet module Set the operation mode setting switch and exchange condition setting switch. AJ71QE71N3-T, AJ71QE71N-B5, AJ71QE71N-B2, A1SJ71QE71N3-T, A1SJ71QE71N-B5, A1SJ71QE71N-B2, AJ71QE71N-T, AJ71QE71N-B5T, A1SJ71QE71N-T, A1SJ71QE71N-B5T, AJ71QE71, AJ71QE71-B5 A1SJ71QE71-B5, A1SJ71QE71-B2 1SJ71QE71N3-T J71QE71N3-T BUF1 BUF2 BUF1 BUF3 BUF2 SW.ERR. BUF4 BUF3 BUF4 COM.ERR.
  • Page 331 When the switch setting has been changed Turn the PLC CPU OFF then ON again, or reset the PLC CPU. 8 - 27 8.3 PLC Side Setting 8.3.2 Connecting to Ethernet module (QnA Series)
  • Page 332 [Network parameter] of GX Developer (1) Network parameter Setting necessity at GOT Item Setting connection Network type Ethernet (fixed) Start I/O No. 0000 Network No. Group No. 0 (fixed) Station No. IP address 192.168.0.19 Station No. <->IP information FTP Parameters (Use default value.) Router relay parameter Routing parameters...
  • Page 333 (2) Communication confirmation The RDY LED on the Ethernet module turn on when the module is ready to communicate. For confirming the communication state, refer to the following. Section 8.3.1 Confirming the communication state of Ethernet module AJ71QE71N3-T, AJ71QE71N-B5, A1SJ71QE71N3-T, A1SJ71QE71N-B5, A1SJ71QE71N-B2, AJ71QE71N-B2, AJ71QE71N-T, A1SJ71QE71N-T, A1SJ71QE71N-B5T, AJ71QE71N-B5T, AJ71QE71, AJ71QE71-B5...

  • Page 334: Connecting To Ethernet Module (A Series)

    8.3.3 Connecting to Ethernet module (A Series) This section describes the settings of the GOT and Ethernet module (A Series) given for the system configuration shown at Ethernet module (A Series) For details of the Ethernet module (A Series), refer to the following manual. For A Ethernet Interface Module User's Manual System configuration [Communication settings] and [Ethernet setting] of GT...
  • Page 335 (1) Operation mode setting switch Setting necessity at GOT Operation mode setting switch Description Setting connection Online 0(fixed) : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary (2) Exchange condition setting switch Exchange condition setting Setting necessity at GOT Setting switch Description Setting switch...
  • Page 336 Sequence program The sequence program for initial processing and communication line opening processing are required. (1) Programming condition This program performs the initial processing of the Ethernet module and the opening processing of connection No. 1 when the stopping PLC CPU starts running. (a) I/O signal of Ethernet module For A Ethernet Interface Module User's Manual (b) Device used by user...
  • Page 337 (c) Settings of buffer memory used in the following example Buffer memory address Item Setting Dec (Hex) 0 to 1 (0 to 1 IP address of Ethernet module C0A80013 (192.168.0.19) 16 (10 Application setting 24 (18 Port No. of Ethernet module 5001 25 to 26 (19 to 1A IP address of GOT...
  • Page 338 (2) Example of sequence program * Initial processing IP address of Ethernet module(192.168.0.19) Turned on at first scan only while detection running Initial request Read the initial fault code. Initial WDT ERR fault detection detection COM. ERR turned off request COM.
  • Page 339 (3) Communication confirmation The RDY LED on the Ethernet module turn on when the module is ready to communicate. For confirming the communication state, refer to the following. Section 8.3.1 Confirming the communication state of Ethernet module The BUF1 LED turns on when the opening processing of the connection No. 1 is completed in normal at executing of the sequence program example described at (2).

  • Page 340: Precautions

    8.4 Precautions Via network system GOT with Ethernet communication cannot access the PLCs in another network via the PLC (network module, Ethernet module, etc.). When connecting to QnA (S) CPU type Use B or a later function version of Ethernet module (QnA Series) and PLC CPU (QnA/QnASCPU type).

  • Page 341: List Of Functions Added By Version Upgrade

    8.5 List of Functions Added by Version Upgrade The following describes the function added by version upgrade of GT Designer2 or OS. For using the function below, use the GT Designer2 or OS of the stated version or later. Version of GT Item Description Version of OS...
  • Page 342 MEMO 8 - 38...
  • Page 343 THIRD PARTY PLC CONNECTIONS Chapter9 CONNECTION TO OMRON PLC Chapter10 CONNECTON TO KEYENCE PLC Chapter11 CONNECTION TO SHARP PLC Chapter12 CONNECTION TO TOSHIBA PLC Chapter13 CONNECTION TO HITACHI PLC Chapter14 CONNECTION TO MATSUSHITA PLC (Continued to next page)
  • Page 344 Chapter15 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC Chapter16 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA Chapter17 CONNECTION TO ALLEN-BRADLEY Chapter18 CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC...
  • Page 345 CONNECTION TO OMRON PLC 9.1 System Configuration ..page 9-2 This section describes the equipment and cables needed when connecting a GOT to an OMRON PLC. Select a system suitable for your application. 9.2 Connection Cable .

  • Page 346: System Configuration

    9.1 System Configuration Select a system configuration suitable for your application. Conventions used in this section Numbers (e.g. ) of System configuration and connection conditions correspond to the numbers (e.g. ) of System equipment. Use these numbers as references when confirming models and applications. 9.1.1 When connecting to CPM1, CPM1A, CPM2A or CPM2C Communication driver...
  • Page 347 When connecting to CPM2A Connection conditions System configuration No. of GOTs Distance RS-232 cable 1) MAX15m 15m or less RS-232C adapter RS-232 cable 1) CIF01 RS232C MAX15m When connecting to CPM2C Connection conditions System configuration No. of GOTs Distance RS-232C adapter RS-232 cable 1) CIF01 RS232C...

  • Page 348: System Configuration

    System equipment (1) GOT Image Name Model name RS-232 RS-232 interface (Built into GOT) • For RS-232 communication RS-232 RS-232 RS-232 Communication Unit GT15-RS2-9P • For RS-232 communication (2) PLC Image Name Model name CIF01 CPM1-CIF01 RS-232C adapter RS232C CPM2C-CIF01-V1 are products manufactured by OMRON.

  • Page 349: Connecting To Cqm1, Cqm1H Or Cj1

    9.1.2 Connecting to CQM1, CQM1H or CJ1 Communication driver OMRON SYSMAC System configuration and connection conditions When connecting to CQM1 Compact PLCs that cannot be connected No GOT can be connected to the CQM1-CPU11 since the CQM1-CPU11 has no RS-232C interface. Connection conditions System configuration No.
  • Page 350 When connecting to CJ1 Connection conditions System configuration No. of GOTs Distance RS-232 cable 1) MAX15m 15m or less Serial communication module RS-232 cable 1) MAX15m Serial communication module RS-422 cable 1) 200m or less MAX200m 9 - 6 9.1 System Configuration 9.1.2 Connecting to CQM1, CQM1H or CJ1...
  • Page 351 System equipment (1) GOT Image Name Model name RS-232 RS-232 interface (Built into GOT) • For RS-232 communication RS-232 RS-232 RS-232 Communication Unit GT15-RS2-9P • For RS-232 communication RS-232 RS-422 conversion unit GT15-RS2T4-9P • For RS-422 communication RS-422/485 RS-422/485 RS-422/485 Communication Unit GT15-RS4-9S •...
  • Page 352 (3) Cable Image Name Model name Connection cable CQM1-CIF02 RS-232 cable 1) • Between CPU, connection cable, serial communication GT09-C30R20101-9P(3m) board, and serial communication module RS-422 cable 1) GT09-C30R40101-9P(3m) • Between serial GT09-C100R40101-9P(10m) communication board, serial GT09-C200R40101-9P(20m) communication module and GT09-C300R40101-9P(30m) *1 The RS-232 and RS-422 cable can be prepared by the user.

  • Page 353: Connecting To C200Hs, C200H, C200H Or Cs1

    9.1.3 Connecting to C200HS, C200H, C200H or CS1 Communication driver OMRON SYSMAC System configuration and connection conditions When connecting to C200HS, C200H Connection conditions System configuration No. of GOTs Distance Rack type host link unit 15m or less RS-232 cable 3) MAX15m Rack type host link unit RS-422 cable 2)
  • Page 354 When connecting to C200H Connection to C200HE Connect a GOT to the C200HE via a rack type host link unit or a communication board. Connection conditions System configuration No. of GOTs Distance RS-232 cable 1) MAX15m Rack type host link unit RS-232 cable 3) 15m or less MAX15m...
  • Page 355 When connecting to CS1 Connection conditions System configuration No. of GOTs Distance RS-232 cable 1) MAX15m Serial communication module RS-232 cable 1) 15m or less MAX15m 9 10 Serial communication board RS-232 cable 1) MAX15m Serial communication board RS-422 cable 1) 200m or less MAX200m 9 - 11...
  • Page 356 System equipment (1) GOT Image Name Model name RS-232 RS-232 interface (Built into GOT) • For RS-232 communication RS-232 RS-232 RS-232 Communication Unit GT15-RS2-9P • For RS-232 communication RS-232 RS-422 conversion unit GT15-RS2T4-9P • For RS-422 communication RS-422/485 RS-422/485 RS-422/485 Communication Unit GT15-RS4-9S •...

  • Page 357: System Configuration

    (3) Cable Image Name Model name RS-232 cable 3) GT09-C30R201103-25P(3m) • Between rack type host link unit and GOT RS-232 cable 1) • Between CPU, communication board, serial GT09-C30R20101-9P(3m) communication unit, serial communication board and GT09-C30R40102-9P(3m) RS-422 cable 2) GT09-C100R40102-9P(10m) •...

  • Page 358: Connecting To C1000H/C2000H, Cv500/Cv1000/Cv2000, Cvm1

    9.1.4 Connecting to C1000H/C2000H, CV500/CV1000/CV2000, CVM1 Communication driver OMRON SYSMAC System configuration and connection conditions When connecting to C1000H, C2000H Connection conditions System configuration No. of GOTs Distance Rack type host link unit 15m or less RS-232 cable 3) MAX15m Rack type host link unit RS-422 cable 2) 200m or less...
  • Page 359 System equipment (1) GOT Image Name Model name RS-232 RS-232 interface (Built into GOT) • For RS-232 communication RS-232 RS-232 RS-232 Communication Unit GT15-RS2-9P • For RS-232 communication RS-232 RS-422 conversion unit GT15-RS2T4-9P • For RS-422 communication RS-422/485 RS-422/485 RS-422/485 Communication Unit GT15-RS4-9S •...
  • Page 360 (3) Cable Image Name Model name RS-232 cable 3) GT09-C30R20103-25P(3m) • Between rack type host link unit and GOT RS-232 cable 1) GT09-C30R20101-9P(3m) • Between CPU and GOT GT09-C30R40102-9P(3m) RS-422 cable 2) GT09-C100R40102-9P(10m) • Between rack type host link GT09-C200R40102-9P(20m) unit and GOT GT09-C300R40102-9P(30m) GT09-C30R40101-9P(3m)

  • Page 361: Connection Cable

    9.2 Connection Cable The RS-232 cable or RS-422 cable used for connecting the GOT to the PLC should be prepared by the user. The following provides connection diagrams for each cable, connector specifications and other information. Connection cable Model RS-232 cable RS-422 cable (See Section 9.2.1) (See Section 9.2.2)

  • Page 362: Rs-232 Cable

    9.2.1 RS-232 cable The following shows the connection diagrams and connector specifications of the RS-232 cable used for connecting the GOT to a PLC. Connection diagram (1) RS-232 cable 1) GOT side OMRON product side Cable connection and signal direction Signal name Pin No.

  • Page 363: Rs-232 Cable

    (3) RS-232 cable 3) GOT side OMRON product side Cable connection and signal direction Signal name Pin No. Pin No. Signal name CD/NC RD(RXD) SD(TXD) ER(DTR) DR(DSR) RS(RTS) CS(CTS) GT15: CD, GT11: NC 9 - 19 9.2 Connection Cable 9.2.1 RS-232 cable...
  • Page 364 Connector specifications (1) GOT side connector Use the following as the RS-232 interface and RS-232 communication unit connector on the GOT. For the GOT side of the RS-232 cable, use a connector or connector cover applicable to the GOT connector. (a) Connector type 9-pin D-sub (male) inch screw fixed type (b) Connector model...

  • Page 365: Rs-422 Cable

    9.2.2 RS-422 cable The following shows the connection diagrams and connector specifications of the RS-422 cable used for connecting the GOT to a PLC. Differences in polarity between GOT and OMRON products The polarity of poles A and B in signal names is reversed between GOT and OMRON products.
  • Page 366 Connector specifications (1) GOT side connector Use the following as the RS-422 interface and RS-422/485 communication unit connector on the GOT. For the GOT side of the RS-422 cable, use a connector and connector cover applicable to the GOT connector. (a) Connector type 9-pin D-sub (female) (b) Connector model...

  • Page 367: Preparatory Procedures For Monitoring

    9.3 Preparatory Procedures for Monitoring The following the procedures to be taken before monitoring and corresponding reference sections. Section 9.3.1 Install the OS onto the GOT. Installing OS onto GOT Section 9.3.2 Make sure that the OS is installed on the GOT. Checking OS installation on GOT Section 9.3.3 Set the communication interface.

  • Page 368: Installing Os Onto Got

    9.3.1 Installing OS onto GOT Install the standard monitor OS, communication driver and option OS onto the GOT. For the OS installation methods, refer to the following manual. GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual Check the following under the Communication driver. •...

  • Page 369: Checking Os Installation On Got

    9.3.2 Checking OS installation on GOT Check if the OS is properly installed or not on the Drive information tab of GT Designer2. For the operation on the Drive information tab, refer to the following manual. GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual The OS has been installed successfully on the GOT if the following can be confirmed: 1) Standard monitor OS...

  • Page 370: Setting Communication Interface (Communication Settings)

    9.3.3 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) Make the GOT communication interface settings on [Communication setting] of GT Designer2. Select the same communication driver as the one installed on the GOT for each communication interface. For details on [Communication setting] of GT Designer2, refer to the following manual. GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual Communication settings...
  • Page 371 Communication detail settings Item Description Range Set this item when change the transmission speed used for com- 4800bps, 9600bps, Transmission Speed munication with the connected equipment. 19200bps, 38400bps, <Default: 19200bps> 57600bps, 115200bps Specify the host address (station No. of the PLC to which the GOT Host Address is connected) in the network of the GOT.

  • Page 372: Downloading Project Data

    9.3.4 Downloading project data Download project data to the GOT. For how to download project data, refer to the following manual. GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual Check the necessary items and click the button. Download Download 9 - 28 9.3 Preparatory Procedures for Monitoring 9.3.4 Downloading project data...

  • Page 373: Attaching Communication Unit And Connecting Cable

    9.3.5 Attaching communication unit and connecting cable Cautions when attaching the communication unit and connecting the cable Shut off all phases of the GOT power supply before attaching the communication unit and connecting the cable. Attaching the communication unit Attach the serial communication unit to the extension unit connector on the GOT.
  • Page 374 How to connect the cable (1) How to connect the RS-232 cable (a) For the GT15 • connection to the RS-232 interface Connect the RS-232 cable to the RS-232 interface on the GOT. • connection to the RS-232 communication unit Connect the RS-232 cable to the RS-232 communication unit on the GOT.
  • Page 375 (2) How to connect the RS-422 cable (a) For the GT15 • connection to the RS-232 interface Connect the RS-422 conversion unit to the RS- 232 interface on the GOT. Connect the RS-422 cable to the RS-422 conversion unit. • connection to the RS-422/485 communication unit Connect the RS-232 cable to the RS-232 communication unit on the GOT.
  • Page 376 When using the RS-422 conversion unit On "Communication settings" on the utility, make setting so that 5V DC power is supplied to the RS-422 conversion unit from the RS-232 interface on the GOT. For details on the utility, refer to the following manual: User's Manual Touch [5V supply].

  • Page 377: Verifying Got Recognizes Connected Equipment

    9.3.6 Verifying GOT recognizes connected equipment Verify the GOT recognizes connected equipments on [Communication setting] of the Utility. • Channel number of communication interface, communication drivers allocation status • Communication unit installation status Remark How to display Utility(at default), utility call key 1-point press on GOT screen upper-left corner When using GT1595-X Utility display...
  • Page 378 After powering up the GOT, touch [Main Menu] [Communication setting] from the Utility. The [Communication setting] appears. Verify that the following communication driver name is displayed in the box for the communication interface to be used. • Communication driver: OMRON SYSMAC When the communication driver name is not displayed normally, carry out the following procedure again.

  • Page 379: Checking For Normal Monitoring

    9.3.7 Checking for normal monitoring Check for errors occurring on the GOT. Presetting the system alarm to project data allows you to identify errors occurred on the GOT, PLC CPU, servo amplifier and communications. For details on the system alarm, refer to the following manual. User’s Manual (When using GT15) Communication...
  • Page 380 Perform an I/O check. Whether the PLC can communicate with the GOT or not can be checked by the I/O check function. If this check ends successfully, it means correct communication interface settings and proper cable connection. Display the I/O check screen by [Main Menu] [Debug &...

  • Page 381: Plc Side Setting

    9.4 PLC Side Setting OMRON PLC For details of OMRON PLCs, refer to the following manuals. Manuals for OMRON PLCs Model Reference CPM2A Section 9.4.1 CQM1, CQM1H Section 9.4.2 PLC CPU C200H Section 9.4.1 Section 9.4.2 CV500, CV1000, CV2000, CVM1 Section 9.4.3 RS-232C adapter CPM1-CIF01, CPM2C-CIF01-V1...

  • Page 382: Connecting Cpm2A, Cqm1, Cqm1H, C200H Or Rs-232C Adapter

    9.4.1 Connecting CPM2A, CQM1, CQM1H, C200H or RS-232C adapter Device settings Write the following set values to devices of each PLC CPU and initialize each port using a peripheral tool or DM monitor. Device name Settings DM6645 0001 (fixed) b15 to b8 b7 to b0 1) RS-232C port transmission 2) RS-232C port communication frame format...

  • Page 383: Connecting Cj1 Or Cs1

    9.4.2 Connecting CJ1 or CS1 Setting DIP switches Set the DIP switches. (1) Setting on the CJ1 ERR/ALM PRPHL COMM DIP switch (inside battery compartment) OPEN MCPWR BUSY PERIPHERAL PORT Switch Description Setting Enable/disable write to user memory (UM) Enable/disable automatic transfer of user program at power ON Free Peripheral port communication condition...
  • Page 384 (2) Setting on the CS1 ERR/ALM PRPHL/COMM DIP switch (inside battery compartment) OPEN MCPWR BUSY OPEN PERIPHERAL PORT Switch Description Setting Enable/disable write to user memory (UM) Enable/disable automatic transfer of user program at power ON Programming console message display language (Japanese/English) Peripheral port communication condition RS-232C communication condition...
  • Page 385 Setting PLC system settings (common to CJ1 and CS1) Make the PLC system settings. Channel Item Setting Arbitrary settings ON/OFF : Arbitrary settings (fixed) 8 to 11 Serial communication mode : Upper link (fixed) Data length : 7 bits (fixed) Stop bit : 2 bits (fixed) 0 to 1...

  • Page 386: Connecting Cv500/Cv1000/Cv2000 Or Cvm1

    9.4.3 Connecting CV500/CV1000/CV2000 or CVM1 Setting DIP switches Set the DIP switches. PERIPHERAL HOST LINK RS-232 RS-422 DIP switch (inside battery compartment) (1) Host link RS-422/232 switch Setting RS-232 RS-232 communication RS-422 communication RS-422 RS-232 (up) RS-422 (down) (2) DIP switches Setting Switch No.
  • Page 387 PLC system settings Make the PLC system settings. Item Setting *1*2 4800bps/9600bps/19200bps Transmission speed Stop bit 2 stop bits (fixed) Parity Even (fixed) Data length 7 bits (fixed) 00 to 31 Station No. Only transmission speeds available on the GOT side are shown. Set the same transmission speed as that of the GOT side.

  • Page 388: Connecting Connection Cable

    9.4.4 Connecting connection cable Device settings Write the following set values to devices of each PLC CPU and initialize each port using a peripheral tool or DM monitor. Device name Settings DM6650 0001 (fixed) b15 to b8 b7 to b0 1) RS-232C port transmission 2) RS-232C port communication frame format *1*2...

  • Page 389: Connecting Rack Type Host Link Unit

    9.4.5 Connecting rack type host link unit Switch setting on C200H-LK201-V1 Set the switches accordingly. Front Rear LK201-V1 ERROR (1) Setting Machine No. (SW1, SW2) Set the Machine No. within the range of 00 to 31 according to the Host Address setting on the GOT side.
  • Page 390 (4) Setting DIP switches Switch No. Setting ON (1:N procedure) OFF (no 5V power supply) (5) Setting the CTS switch Setting Switch setting on C200H-LK202-V1 Set the switches accordingly. Front Rear LK201-V1 ERROR (1) Setting Machine No. (SW1, SW2) Set the Machine No. within the range of 00 to 31. Set the Machine No.
  • Page 391 (3) Setting command level/ parity/ transmission code (SW4) Setting details Setting Command level Parity Transmission code ASCII 7 bits 2 (fixed) Levels 1, 2 and 3 enabled Even 2 stop bits (4) Setting the 1:1 / 1:N procedure switch Setting OFF (1:N procedure) (5) Setting the terminating resistor connection switch Setting...
  • Page 392 Switch setting on C500HLK201-V1 Set the switches accordingly. Front Rear In operation Receiving Transmitting Transmission error Mode selection Host link Local (1) Setting host link/local Setting Host link (2) RS-232C/RS-422 switch Setting RS-232 communication RS-422 communication RS-232 (down) RS-422 (up) (3) Internal/external clock switch Setting Internal (up)
  • Page 393 (6) Setting SW1 (Station No., Run/Stop) Switch No. Setting Description Set the station No. within the range of 00 to 31. Refer to the following manual for details. OMRON PLC manual (7) Setting SW2 (Transmission speed, Procedure, Level) Switch No. Setting Description Levels 1, 2 and 3 enabled...

  • Page 394: Connecting Serial Communication Unit

    9.4.6 Connecting serial communication unit Device settings Write the following set values to devices of each PLC CPU and initialize each port using a peripheral tool or DM monitor. Device name Settings Port 1 Port 2 8000 (fixed): The settings are: Port setting : Arbitrary setting Serial communication mode : Host link...

  • Page 395: Connecting Communication Board, Serial Communication Board (Cqm1-Scb41)

    9.4.7 Connecting communication board, serial communication board (CQM1-SCB41) Device settings Write the following set values to devices of each PLC CPU and initialize each port using a peripheral tool or DM monitor. Device name Setting Port B Port A DM6550 DM6555 0001 (fixed)

  • Page 396: Connecting Serial Communication Board (Cs1W-Scb21, Cs1W-Scb41)

    9.4.8 Connecting serial communication board (CS1W-SCB21, CS1W- SCB41) Device settings Write the following set values to devices of each PLC CPU and initialize each port using a peripheral tool or DM monitor. Device name Setting Port 1 Port 2 8000 (fixed): The settings are: Port setting : Arbitrary setting...
  • Page 397 Setting the DIP switches (CS1W-SCB41 only) Set the DIP switches when performing the RS-422 communications on the CS1W-SCB41. COMM1 COMM2 TERM ON TERM WIRE 4 WIRE PORT2 (RS422/ RS485) SCB41-V1 DIP switch Settings Name Description WIRE 2-wire/4-wire type switch 4 (4-wire type) TERM Terminator ON/OFF switch 1 (no terminating resistor attached)

  • Page 398: List Of Functions Added By Version Upgrade

    9.5 List of Functions Added by Version Upgrade The following describes the function added by version upgrade of GT Designer2 or OS. For using the function below, use the GT Designer2 or OS of the stated version or later. Version of GT Item Description Version of OS...
  • Page 399 CONNECTON TO KEYENCE PLC 10.1 System configuration ..page 10-2 This section describes the equipment and cables needed when connecting a GOT to a KEYENCE PLC. Select a system suitable for your application. 10.2 Connection cable.

  • Page 400: System Configuration

    10.1 System configuration Select a system configuration suitable for your application. Conventions used in this section Numbers (e.g. ) of System configuration and connection conditions correspond to the numbers (e.g. ) of System equipment. Use these numbers as references when confirming models and applications. 10 - 2 10.1 System configuration...

  • Page 401: Rs-485 Cable

    10.1.1 Connecting to KV-1000 Communication driver KEYENCE KV-700/1000 System configuration and connection conditions Connection conditions System configuration Number of Distance GOTs Conversion connector 15m or less RS-232 cable 1) MAX15m RS-232 cable 2) 15m or less MAX15m Multi-communication unit, port1 15m or less RS-232 cable 3) MAX15m...
  • Page 402 System equipment (1) GOT Image Name Model name RS-232 RS-232 interface (Built into GOT) • For RS-232 communication RS-232 RS-232 RS-232 Communication Unit GT15-RS2-9P • For RS-232 communication RS-232 RS-422 conversion unit GT15-RS2T4-9P • For RS-422 communication RS-422 RS-422 RS-422/485 Communication /485 /485 Unit...
  • Page 403 (3) Cable Image Name Model name RS-232 cable 1) • Between conversion OP-26487(2.5m) connector and GOT RS-232 cable 2) To be prepared by the user Section 10.2 Connection cable • Between PLC and GOT RS-232 cable 3) Between multi-communication GT09-C30R21102-9S(3m) unit and GOT RS-232 cable 4) •...
  • Page 404 10.1.2 Connecting to KV-700 Communication driver KEYENCE KV-700/1000 System configuration and connection conditions Connection conditions System configuration Number of Distance GOTs Conversion connector KEYENCE KV-700 RS-232 cable 1) 15m or less HYPER ACCESS WINDOW PROG CARD SERIAL MAX15m KEYENCE KV-700 RS-232 cable 2) HYPER ACCESS WINDOW 15m or less...
  • Page 405 System equipment (1) GOT Image Name Model name RS-232 RS-232 interface (Built into GOT) • For RS-232 communication RS-232 RS-232 RS-232 Communication Unit GT15-RS2-9P • For RS-232 communication RS-232 RS-422 conversion unit GT15-RS2T4-9P • For RS-422 communication RS-422 RS-422 RS-422/485 Communication /485 /485 Unit...
  • Page 406 (3) Cable Image Name Model name RS-232 cable 1) • Between conversion OP-26487(2.5m) connector and GOT RS-232 cable 2) To be prepared by the user Section 10.2 Connection cable) • Between PLC and GOT RS-232 cable 3) GT09-C30R21102-9S(3m) • Between multi- communication unit and GOT RS-232 cable 4) GT09-C30R21103-3T(3m)

  • Page 407: Connection Cable

    10.2 Connection cable The RS-232 cable or RS-422 cable used for connecting the GOT to the PLC should be prepared by the user. The following provides connection diagrams for each cable, connector specifications and other information. Connection cable Model name RS-232 cable RS-422 cable RS-485 cable...
  • Page 408 10.2.1 RS-232 cable The following shows the connection diagrams and connector specifications of the RS-232 cable used for connecting the GOT to a PLC. Connection diagram (1) RS-232 cable 2) KEYENCE product side GOT side (Modular 6-pin) Cable connection and signal direction Signal name Pin No.
  • Page 409 (3) RS-232 cable 4) KEYENCE product side GOT side (Terminal block) Cable connection and signal direction Signal name Pin No. Pin No. Signal name RD(RXD) SD(TXD) ER(DTR) DR(DSR) RS(RTS) CS(CTS) 10 - 11 10.2 Connection cable 10.2.1 RS-232 cable...
  • Page 410 Connector specifications (1) GOT side connector Use the following as the RS-232 interface and RS-232 communication unit connector on the GOT. For the GOT side of the RS-232 cable, use a connector or connector cover applicable to the GOT connector. (a) Connector type 9-pin D-sub (male) inch screw fixed type (b) Connector model...
  • Page 411 10.2.2 RS-422 cable The following shows the connection diagrams and connector specifications of the RS-422 cable used for connecting the GOT to a PLC. Connection diagram (1) RS-422 cable 1) KEYENCE product side GOT side (Terminal block) Cable connection and signal direction Signal name Pin No.
  • Page 412 Connector specifications (1) GOT side connector Use the following as the RS-422 interface and RS-422/485 communication unit connector on the GOT. For the GOT side of the RS-422 cable, use a connector and connector cover applicable to the GOT connector. (a) Connector type 9-pin D-sub (female) (b) Connector model...
  • Page 413 10.2.3 RS-485 cable The following shows the connection diagrams and connector specifications of the RS-232 cable used for connecting the GOT to a PLC. Connection diagram (1) RS-485 cable 1) KEYENCE product side GOT side (Terminal block) Cable connection and signal direction Signal name Pin No.
  • Page 414 Connector specifications (1) GOT side connector Use the following as the RS-422/485 communication unit connector on the GOT. For the GOT side of the RS-422 cable, use a connector and connector cover applicable to the GOT connector. Connector model Connector type Manufacturer GT11 17LE-13090-27(D3AC)

  • Page 415: Preparatory Procedures For Monitoring

    10.3 Preparatory Procedures for Monitoring The following shows the procedures to be taken before monitoring and corresponding reference sections. Section 10.3.1 Install the OS onto the GOT. Installing OS onto GOT Section 10.3.2 Make sure that the OS is installed on the GOT. Checking OS installation on GOT Section 10.3.3 Set the communication interface.
  • Page 416 10.3.1 Installing OS onto GOT Install the standard monitor OS, communication driver and option OS onto the GOT. For the OS installation methods, refer to the following manual. GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual Check the following under the Communication d •...
  • Page 417 10.3.2 Checking OS installation on GOT Check if the OS is properly installed or not on the Drive information tab of GT Designer2. For the operation on the Drive information tab, refer to the following manual. GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual The OS has been installed successfully on the GOT if the following can be confirmed: 1) Satndard monitor OS...
  • Page 418 10.3.3 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) Make the GOT communication interface settings on [Communication setting] of GT Designer2. Select the same communication driver as the one installed on the GOT for each communication interface. For details on [Communication setting] of GT Designer2, refer to the following manual. GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual Communication settings...
  • Page 419 Communication detail settings Item Description Range Set this item when change the transmission speed used for 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps, Transmission Speed communication with the connected equipment. 57600bps, 115200bps <Default: 9600bps> Set this item when change the data length used for Data Bit communication with the connected equipment.
  • Page 420 (1) Communication interface setting by Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility's "Communication setting" after downloading "Communication setting" of project data. For details on the Utility, refer to the following manual. User's Manual (2) Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer or the Utility, the latest setting is effective.
  • Page 421 10.3.4 Downloading project data Download project data to the GOT. For how to download project data, refer to the following manual. GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual Check the necessary items and click the button. Download Download 10 - 23 10.3 Preparatory Procedures for Monitoring 10.3.4 Downloading project data...
  • Page 422 10.3.5 Attaching communication unit and connecting cable Cautions when attaching the communication unit and connecting the cable Shut off all phases of the GOT power supply before attaching the communication unit and connecting the cable. Attaching the communication unit Attach the serial communication unit to the extension unit connector on the GOT.
  • Page 423 How to connect the cable (1) How to connect the RS-232 cable (a) For the GT15 • connection to the RS-232 interface Connect the RS-232 cable to the RS-232 interface on the GOT. • connection to the RS-232 communication unit Connect the RS-232 cable to the RS-232 communication unit on the GOT.
  • Page 424 (2) How to connect the RS-422 cable (a) For the GT15 • connection to the RS-232 interface Connect the RS-422 conversion unit to the RS- 232 interface on the GOT. Connect the RS-422 cable to the RS-422 conversion unit. • connection to the RS-422/485 communication unit Connect the RS-232 cable to the RS-232 communication unit on the GOT.
  • Page 425 When using the RS-422 conversion unit On "Communication settings" on the utility, make setting so that 5V DC power is supplied to the RS-422 conversion unit from the RS-232 interface on the GOT. For details on the utility, refer to the following manual: User's Manual Touch [5V supply].
  • Page 426 (1) How to connect the RS-485 cable (a) For the GT15 Connect the RS-485 cable to the RS-422/485 communication unit on the GOT. (a) For the GT11 Connect the RS-485 cable to the RS-422 interface on the GOT. 10 - 28 10.3 Preparatory Procedures for Monitoring 10.3.5 Attaching communication unit and connecting cable...
  • Page 427 10.3.6 Verifying GOT recognizes connected equipment Verify the GOT recognizes connected equipments on [Communication setting] of the Utility. • Channel number of communication interface, communication drivers allocation status • Communication unit installation status Remark How to display Utility(at default), utility call key 1-point press on GOT screen upper-left corner When using GT1595-X Utility display...
  • Page 428 After powering up the GOT, touch [Main Menu] [Communication setting] from the Utility. The [Communication setting] appears. Verify that the following communication driver name is displayed in the box for the communication interface to be used. • Communication driver: KEYENCE KV- 700/1000 When the communication driver name is not displayed normally, carry out the...
  • Page 429 10.3.7 Checking for normal monitoring Check for errors occurring on the GOT. Presetting the system alarm to project data allows you to identify errors occurred on the GOT, PLC CPU, servo amplifier and communications. For details on the system alarm, refer to the following manual. User’s Manual (When using GT15) Communication...
  • Page 430 Perform an I/O check Whether the PLC can communicate with the GOT or not can be checked by the I/O check function. If this check ends successfully, it means correct communication interface settings and proper cable connection. Display the I/O check screen by [Main Menu] [Debug &...

  • Page 431: Plc Side Setting

    10.4 PLC Side Setting KEYENCE PLC For details of KEYENCE PLC, refer to the following manual. User’s Manual for the KEYENCE PLC Model name Reference KV-1000 Section 10.4.1 PLC CPU KV-700 Section 10.4.2 KV-L20R Multi-communication unit Section 10.4.3 KV-L20 10.4.1 Connecting KV-1000 Setting items Set value Transmission speed...

  • Page 432: Connecting Multi-Communication Unit (Kv-L20R, Kv-L20)

    10.4.3 Connecting multi-communication unit (KV-L20R, KV-L20) Communication settings Setting items Set value Communication mode KV mode (upper link) *1*2 4800bps, 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps, 57600bps, 115200bps Transmission speed Data length 8 bits Parity bit Even Stop bit 1 bit 0 to 9 Station No.
  • Page 433 (2) Terminator setting switch Set when carrying out RS-422 communication. Settings When multi-communication unit is a When multi-communication unit is not a terminal terminal 10 - 35 10.4 PLC Side Setting 10.4.3 Connecting multi-communication unit (KV-L20R, KV-L20)

  • Page 434: List Of Functions Added By Version Upgrade

    10.5 List of Functions Added by Version Upgrade The following describes the function added by version upgrade of GT Designer2 or OS. For using the function below, use the GT Designer2 or OS of the stated version or later. Version of GT Item Description Version of OS...
  • Page 435 CONNECTION TO SHARP PLC 11.1 System Configuration ..page 11-2 This section describes the equipment and cables needed when connecting a GOT to a SHARP PLC. Select a system suitable for your application. 11.2 Connection Cable .

  • Page 436: Connecting To Jw-21Cu Or Jw-22Cu

    11.1 System Configuration Select a system configuration suitable for your application. Conventions used in this section Numbers (e.g. ) of System configuration and connection conditions correspond to the numbers (e.g. ) of System equipment. Use these numbers as references when confirming models and applications. 11.1.1 Connecting to JW-21CU or JW-22CU Communication driver SHARP JW...
  • Page 437 System equipment (1) GOT Image Name Model name RS-232 RS-232 interface (Built into GOT) • For RS-232 communication RS-232 RS-232 RS-232 Communication Unit GT15-RS2-9P • For RS-232 communication RS-232 RS-422 conversion unit GT15-RS2T4-9P • For RS-422 communication RS-422/485 RS-422/485 RS-422/485 Communication Unit GT15-RS4-9S •...
  • Page 438 (3) Cable Image Name Model name RS-232 cable 1) GT09-C30R20601-15P(3m) • Between CPU and GOT GT09-C30R40601-15P(3m) RS-422 cable 1) GT09-C100R40601-15P(10m) • Between CPU and GOT GT09-C200R40601-15P(20m) GT09-C300R40601-15P(30m) GT09-C30R40603-6T(3m) RS-422 cable 3) GT09-C100R40603-6T(10m) • Between link unit and GOT GT09-C200R40603-6T(20m) GT09-C300R40603-6T(30m) *1 The RS-232 and RS-422 cable can be prepared by the user.

  • Page 439: Connecting To Jw-31Cuh, Jw-32Cuh Or Jw-33Cuh

    11.1.2 Connecting to JW-31CUH, JW-32CUH or JW-33CUH Communication driver SHARP JW System configuration and connection conditions When connecting to JW-31CUH Connection conditions System configuration Number of Distance GOTs Link unit Differs according to PLC side RS-422 cable 3) specifications. When connecting to JW-32CUH or JW-33CUH Connection conditions System configuration Number of...
  • Page 440 System equipment (1) GOT Image Name Model name RS-232 RS-232 interface (Built into GOT) • For RS-232 communication RS-232 RS-232 RS-232 Communication Unit GT15-RS2-9P • For RS-232 communication RS-232 RS-422 conversion unit GT15-RS2T4-9P • For RS-422 communication RS-422/485 RS-422/485 RS-422/485 Communication Unit GT15-RS4-9S •...
  • Page 441 (3) Cable Image Name Model name RS-232 cable 2) GT09-C30R20602-15P(3m) • Between CPU and GOT GT09-C30R40602-15P(3m) RS-422 cable 2) GT09-C100R40602-15P(10m) • Between CPU and GOT GT09-C200R40602-15P(20m) GT09-C300R40602-15P(30m) GT09-C30R40603-6T(3m) RS-422 cable 3) GT09-C100R40603-6T(10m) • Between link unit and GOT GT09-C200R40603-6T(20m) GT09-C300R40603-6T(30m) *1 The RS-232 and RS-422 cable can be prepared by the user.

  • Page 442: Connecting To Jw-50Cuh

    11.1.3 Connecting to JW-50CUH Communication driver SHARP JW System configuration and connection conditions Connection conditions System configuration Number of Distance GOTs Link unit Differs according to PLC side RS-422 cable 3) specifications. System equipment (1) GOT Image Name Model name RS-232 RS-422 conversion unit GT15-RS2T4-9P...

  • Page 443: System Configuration

    (3) Cable Image Name Model name GT09-C30R40603-6T(3m) RS-422 cable 3) GT09-C100R40603-6T(10m) • Between link unit and GOT GT09-C200R40603-6T(20m) GT09-C300R40603-6T(30m) *1 The RS-232 and RS-422 cable can be prepared by the user. Section 11.2 Connection Cable) 11 - 9 11.1 System Configuration 11.1.3 Connecting to JW-50CUH...

  • Page 444: Connecting To Jw-70Cuh, Jw-100Cuh Or Jw-100Cu

    11.1.4 Connecting to JW-70CUH, JW-100CUH or JW-100CU Communication driver SHARP JW System configuration and connection conditions Connection conditions System configuration Number of Distance GOTs RS-232 cable 1) RS-422 cable 1) Differs according to PLC side specifications. Link unit RS-422 cable 3) 11 - 10 11.1 System Configuration 11.1.4 Connecting to JW-70CUH, JW-100CUH or JW-100CU...
  • Page 445 System equipment (1) GOT Image Name Model name RS-232 RS-232 interface (Built into GOT) • For RS-232 communication RS-232 RS-232 RS-232 Communication Unit GT15-RS2-9P • For RS-232 communication RS-232 RS-422 conversion unit GT15-RS2T4-9P • For RS-422 communication RS-422/485 RS-422/485 RS-422/485 Communication Unit GT15-RS4-9S •...
  • Page 446 Cable Image Name Model name RS-232 cable 1) GT09-C30R20601-15P(3m) • Between CPU and GOT GT09-C30R40601-15P(3m) RS-422 cable 1) GT09-C100R40601-15P(10m) • Between CPU and GOT GT09-C200R40601-15P(20m) GT09-C300R40601-15P(30m) GT09-C30R40603-6T(3m) RS-422 cable 3) GT09-C100R40603-6T(10m) • Between link unit and GOT GT09-C200R40603-6T(20m) GT09-C300R40603-6T(30m) *1 The RS-232 and RS-422 cable can be prepared by the user. Section 11.2 Connection Cable) 11 - 12 11.1 System Configuration...

  • Page 447: Connecting To Z-512J

    11.1.5 Connecting to Z-512J Communication driver SHARP JW System configuration and connection conditions Connection conditions System configuration Number of Distance GOTs RS-232 cable 2) Differs according to PLC side RS-422 cable 2) specifications. System equipment (1) GOT Image Name Model name RS-232 RS-232 interface (Built into GOT)
  • Page 448 (2) Cable Image Name Model name RS-232 cable 2) GT09-C30R20602-15P(3m) • Between CPU and GOT GT09-C30R40602-15P(3m) GT09-C100R40602-15P(10m) RS-422 cable 2) GT09-C200R40602-15P(20m) • Between CPU and GOT GT09-C300R40602-15P(30m) *1 The RS-232 and RS-422 cable can be prepared by the user. ( Section 11.2 Connection Cable) 11 - 14 11.1 System Configuration...
  • Page 449 11.2 Connection Cable The RS-232 cable or RS-422 cable used for connecting the GOT to the PLC should be prepared by the user. The following provides connection diagrams for each cable, connector specifications and other information. Connection cable Model name RS-232 cable RS-422 cable (Refer to Section 11.2.1.)

  • Page 450: Connection Cable

    11.2.1 RS-232 cable The following shows the connection diagrams and connector specifications of the RS-232 cable used for connecting the GOT to a PLC. Connection diagram (1) RS-232 cable 1) GOT side SHARP product side Cable connection and signal direction Signal name Pin No.
  • Page 451 Connector specifications (1) GOT side connector Use the following as the RS-232 interface and RS-232 communication unit connector on the GOT. For the GOT side of the RS-232 cable, use a connector or connector cover applicable to the GOT connector. (a) Connector type 9-pin D-sub (male) inch screw fixed type (b) Connector model...

  • Page 452: Rs-422 Cable

    11.2.2 RS-422 cable The following shows the connection diagrams and connector specifications of the RS-422 cable used for connecting the GOT to a PLC. Wiring diagram (1) RS-422 cable 1) GOT side SHARP product side Cable connection and signal direction Signal name Pin No.
  • Page 453 (3) RS-422 cable 3) GOT side SHARP product side Cable connection and signal direction Terminal block Signal name Pin No. Signal name name SD(+) SD(-) RD(+) RD(-) SHIELD FG(GND) Two SHIELD terminals are provided for JW-10CM and ZW-10CM. Connect to either SHIELD terminal. Connector specifications (1) GOT side connector Use the following as the RS-422 interface and RS-422/485 communication unit connector on the...
  • Page 454 Connecting terminating resistors Connect the terminating resistor on the SHARP PLC side when connecting a GOT to a SHARP PLC. No terminating resistor needs to be connected on the GOT side as one is already built into the GOT. The PLC CPUs and the modules on the PLC CPU side requiring a terminating resistor are shown below.

  • Page 455: Preparatory Procedures For Monitoring

    11.3 Preparatory Procedures for Monitoring The following shows the procedures to be taken before monitoring and corresponding reference sections. Section 11.3.1 Install the OS onto the GOT. Installing OS onto GOT Section 11.3.2 Make sure that the OS is installed on the GOT. Checking OS installation on GOT Section 11.3.3 Set the communication interface.

  • Page 456: Installing Os Onto Got

    11.3.1 Installing OS onto GOT Install the standard monitor OS, communication driver and option OS onto the GOT. For the OS installation methods, refer to the following manual. GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual Check the following under the Communication driver. •...

  • Page 457: Checking Os Installation On Got

    11.3.2 Checking OS installation on GOT Check if the OS is properly installed or not on the Drive information tab of GT Designer2. For the operation on the Drive information tab, refer to the following manual. GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual The OS has been installed successfully on the GOT if the following can be confirmed: 1) Satndard monitor OS...

  • Page 458: Setting Communication Interface (Communication Settings)

    11.3.3 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) Make the GOT communication interface settings on [Communication setting] of GT Designer2. Select the same communication driver as the one installed on the GOT for each communication interface. For details on [Communication setting] of GT Designer2, refer to the following manual. GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual Communication settings...
  • Page 459 Communication detail settings Item Description Range Set this item when change the transmission speed used for Transmission Speed communication with the connected equipment. 4800bps, 9600bps, 19200bps <Default: 19200bps> Specify the time period from the GOT startup until GOT starts Startup Time the communication with the PLC CPU.

  • Page 460: Downloading Project Data

    11.3.4 Downloading project data Download project data to the GOT. For how to download project data, refer to the following manual. GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual Check the necessary items and click the button. Download Download 11 - 26 11.3 Preparatory Procedures for Monitoring 11.3.4 Downloading project data...

  • Page 461: Attaching Communication Unit And Connecting Cable

    11.3.5 Attaching communication unit and connecting cable Cautions when attaching the communication unit and connecting the cable Shut off all phases of the GOT power supply before attaching the communication unit and connecting the cable. Attaching the communication unit Attach the serial communication unit to the extension unit connector on the GOT.
  • Page 462 How to connect the cable (1) How to connect the RS-232 cable (a) For the GT15 • connection to the RS-232 interface Connect the RS-232 cable to the RS-232 interface on the GOT. • connection to the RS-232 communication unit Connect the RS-232 cable to the RS-232 communication unit on the GOT.
  • Page 463 (2) How to connect the RS-422 cable (a) For the GT15 • connection to the RS-232 interface Connect the RS-422 conversion unit to the RS- 232 interface on the GOT. Connect the RS-422 cable to the RS-422 conversion unit. • connection to the RS-422/485 communication unit Connect the RS-232 cable to the RS-232 communication unit on the GOT.
  • Page 464 When using the RS-422 conversion unit On "Communication settings" on the utility, make setting so that 5V DC power is supplied to the RS-422 conversion unit from the RS-232 interface on the GOT. For details on the utility, refer to the following manual: User's Manual Touch [5V supply].

  • Page 465: Verifying Got Recognizes Connected Equipment

    11.3.6 Verifying GOT recognizes connected equipment Verify the GOT recognizes connected equipments on [Communication setting] of the Utility. • Channel number of communication interface, communication drivers allocation status • Communication unit installation status Remark How to display Utility(at default), utility call key 1-point press on GOT screen upper-left corner When using GT1595-X Utility display...
  • Page 466 After powering up the GOT, touch [Main Menu] [Communication setting] from the Utility. The [Communication setting] appears. Verify that the following communication driver name is displayed in the box for the communication interface to be used. • Communication driver: SHARP JW When the communication driver name is not displayed normally, carry out the following procedure again.

  • Page 467: Checking For Normal Monitoring

    11.3.7 Checking for normal monitoring Check for errors occurring on the GOT. Presetting the system alarm to project data allows you to identify errors occurred on the GOT, PLC CPU, servo amplifier and communications. For details on the system alarm, refer to the following manual. User’s Manual (When using GT15) Communication...
  • Page 468 Perform an I/O check Whether the PLC can communicate with the GOT or not can be checked by the I/O check function. If this check ends successfully, it means correct communication interface settings and proper cable connection. Display the I/O check screen by [Main Menu] [Debug &...
  • Page 469 11.4 PLC Side Setting SHARP PLC For details of the SHARP PLC, refer to the following manual. User's Manual for the SHARP PLC Model name Reference JW-22CU Section 11.4.1 JW-32CUH, JW-33CUH Section 11.4.2 PLC CPU JW-70CUH, JW-100CUH, JW-100CU Section 11.4.1 Z-512J Section 11.4.2 JW-21CM...

  • Page 470: Connecting To Jw-22Cu, Jw-70Cuh, Jw-100Cuh Or Jw-100Cu

    11.4.1 Connecting to JW-22CU, JW-70CUH, JW-100CUH or JW-100CU System memory setting Make the system memory setting. System memory No. Item Setting D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 0 (3) Transmission speed 000: 19200bps Transmission speed, parity and 001: 9600bps #236 stop bit 010: 4800bps Parity...

  • Page 471: Connecting To Jw-32Cuh, Jw-33Cuh Or Z-512J

    11.4.2 Connecting to JW-32CUH, JW-33CUH or Z-512J Settings for connecting to communication port 1 (PG/COMM1 port) Set the system memory. System memory No. Item Setting D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 0 (3) Transmission speed 000: 19200bps Transmission speed, parity and 001: 9600bps #234 stop bit...

  • Page 472: Connecting To The Link Unit (Jw-31Cm)

    11.4.3 Connecting to the link unit (JW-31CM) Switch setting of the link unit (JW-21CM) Make setting for each switch. JW-21CM CM 30 RO TERF 80 40 20 10 8 4 2 1 Inside the front panel Side view indicated by A UNIT UNIT SHIELD...
  • Page 473 (5) Transmission speed setting switch (SW4) Specify the transmission speed to match the transmission speed of the GOT. For how to set the transmission speed of the GOT, refer to the following. Section 11.3.3 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) Description Setting* 19200bps 9600bps...

  • Page 474: Connecting To The Link Unit (Jw-10Cm Or Zw-10Cm)

    11.4.4 Connecting to the link unit (JW-10CM or ZW-10CM) Switch setting of link unit (JW-10CM and ZW-10CM) Inside the cover of switch setting (1) Function setting switch(SW0) Setting Description 4 (fixed) Computer link(command mode) (2) Station number switch(SW1,CSW2) Switch No. Setting Description Station No.
  • Page 475 (4) Transmission speed setting switch (SW4) Specify the transmission speed to match the transmission speed of the GOT. For how to set the transmission speed of the GOT, refer to the following. Section 11.3.3 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) Description Setting* 19200bps 9600bps...

  • Page 476: List Of Functions Added By Version Upgrade

    11.5 List of Functions Added by Version Upgrade The following describes the function added by version upgrade of GT Designer2 or OS. For using the function below, use the GT Designer2 or OS of the stated version or later. Version of GT Item Description Version of OS...
  • Page 477 CONNECTION TO TOSHIBA PLC 12.1 System Configuration ..page 12-2 This section describes the equipment and cables needed when connecting a GOT to a TOSHIBA PLC. Select a system suitable for your application. 12.2 Connection Cable .

  • Page 478: Connecting To T2 (Pu224), T2E, T2N, T3 Or T3H

    12.1 System Configuration Select a system configuration suitable for your application. Conventions used in this section Numbers (e.g. ) of System configuration and connection conditions correspond to the numbers (e.g. ) of System equipment. Use these numbers as references when confirming models and applications. 12.1.1 Connecting to T2 (PU224), T2E, T2N, T3 or T3H Communication driver TOSHIBA PROSEC T/V...
  • Page 479 When connecting to T2N Connection conditions System configuration Number of Distance GOTs RS-232 cable 2) MAX15m RS-422 cable 3) MAX1km 12 - 3 12.1 System Configuration 12.1.1 Connecting to T2 (PU224), T2E, T2N, T3 or T3H...
  • Page 480 System equipment (1) GOT Image Name Model name RS-232 RS-232 interface (Built into GOT) • For RS-232 communication RS-232 RS-232 RS-232 Communication Unit GT15-RS2-9P • For RS-232 communication RS-232 RS-422 conversion unit GT15-RS2T4-9P • For RS-422 communication RS-422/485 RS-422/485 RS-422/485 Communication Unit GT15-RS4-9S •...

  • Page 481: Connecting To Model 3000 (S2/S3)

    12.1.2 Connecting to model 3000 (S2/S3) Communication driver TOSHIBA PROSEC T/V System configuration and connection conditions When connecting to model 3000 (S2) Connection conditions System configuration Number of Distance GOTs RS-422 cable 2) MAX1km When connecting to model 3000 (S3) Connection conditions System configuration Number of...
  • Page 482 (2) Cable Image Name Model name GT09-C30R40502-6C(3m) RS-422 cable 2) GT09-C100R40502-6C(10m) • Between CPU and GOT GT09-C200R40502-6C(20m) GT09-C300R40502-6C(30m) GT09-C30R40501-15P(3m) RS-422 cable 1) GT09-C100R40501-15P(10m) • Between CPU and GOT GT09-C200R40501-15P(20m) GT09-C300R40501-15P(30m) *1 The RS-232 cable can be prepared by the user. ( Section 12.2 Connection Cable) 12 - 6 12.1 System Configuration...
  • Page 483 12.2 Connection Cable The RS-232 cable or RS-422 cable used for connecting the GOT to the PLC should be prepared by the user. The following provides connection diagrams for each cable, connector specifications and other information. Connection Cable Model name RS-232 cable RS-422 cable (Refer to Section 12.2.1.)
  • Page 484 12.2.1 RS-232 cable The following shows the connection diagrams and connector specifications of the RS-232 cable used for connecting the GOT to a PLC. Connection diagram (1) RS-232 cable 1) GOT side TOSHIBA product side Cable connection and signal direction Signal name Pin No.
  • Page 485 Connector specifications (1) GOT side connector Use the following as the RS-232 interface and RS-232 communication unit connector on the GOT. For the GOT side of the RS-232 cable, use a connector or connector cover applicable to the GOT connector. (a) Connector type 9-pin D-sub (male) inch screw fixed type (b) Connector model...
  • Page 486 12.2.2 RS-422 cable The following shows the connection diagrams and connector specifications of the RS-422 cable used for connecting the GOT to a PLC. Connection diagram (1) RS-422 cable 1) GOT side TOSHIBA product side Cable connection and signal direction Signal name Pin No.
  • Page 487 Connector specifications (1) GOT side connector Use the following as the RS-422 interface and RS-422/485 communication unit connector on the GOT. For the GOT side of the RS-422 cable, use a connector and connector cover applicable to the GOT connector. (a) Connector type 9-pin D-sub (female) (b) Connector model...
  • Page 488 12.3 Preparatory Procedures for Monitoring The following shows the procedures to be taken before monitoring and corresponding reference sections. Section 12.3.1 Install the OS onto the GOT. Installing OS onto GOT Section 12.3.2 Make sure that the OS is installed on the GOT. Checking OS installation on GOT Section 12.3.3 Set the communication interface.
  • Page 489 12.3.1 Installing OS onto GOT Install the standard monitor OS, communication driver and option OS onto the GOT. For the OS installation methods, refer to the following manual. GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual Check the following under the Communication driver. •...
  • Page 490 12.3.2 Checking OS installation on GOT Check if the OS is properly installed or not on the Drive information tab of GT Designer2. For the operation on the Drive information tab, refer to the following manual. GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual The OS has been installed successfully on the GOT if the following can be confirmed: 1) Standard monitor OS...
  • Page 491 12.3.3 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) Make the GOT communication interface settings on [Communication setting] of GT Designer2. Select the same communication driver as the one installed on the GOT for each communication interface. For details on [Communication setting] of GT Designer2, refer to the following manual. GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual Communication settings...
  • Page 492 Communication detail settings Item Description Range Set this item when change the transmission speed used for Transmission Speed communication with the connected equipment. 4800bps, 9600bps, 19200bps <Default: 9600bps> (1) Communication interface setting by Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility's "Communication setting"...
  • Page 493 12.3.4 Downloading project data Download project data to the GOT. For how to download project data, refer to the following manual. GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual Check the necessary items and click the button. Download Download 12 - 17 12.3 Preparatory Procedures for Monitoring 12.3.4 Downloading project data...
  • Page 494 12.3.5 Attaching communication unit and connecting cable Cautions when attaching the communication unit and connecting the cable Shut off all phases of the GOT power supply before attaching the communication unit and connecting the cable. Attaching the communication unit Attach the serial communication unit to the extension unit connector on the GOT.
  • Page 495 How to connect the cable (1) How to connect the RS-232 cable (a) For the GT15 • connection to the RS-232 interface Connect the RS-232 cable to the RS-232 interface on the GOT. • connection to the RS-232 communication unit Connect the RS-232 cable to the RS-232 communication unit on the GOT.
  • Page 496 (2) How to connect the RS-422 cable (a) For the GT15 • connection to the RS-232 interface Connect the RS-422 conversion unit to the RS- 232 interface on the GOT. Connect the RS-422 cable to the RS-422 conversion unit. • connection to the RS-422/485 communication unit Connect the RS-232 cable to the RS-232 communication unit on the GOT.
  • Page 497 When using the RS-422 conversion unit On "Communication settings" on the utility, make setting so that 5V DC power is supplied to the RS-422 conversion unit from the RS-232 interface on the GOT. For details on the utility, refer to the following manual: User's Manual Touch [5V supply].
  • Page 498 12.3.6 Verifying GOT recognizes connected equipment Verify the GOT recognizes connected equipments on [Communication setting] of the Utility. • Channel number of communication interface, communication drivers allocation status • Communication unit installation status Remark How to display Utility(at default), utility call key 1-point press on GOT screen upper-left corner When using GT1595-X Utility display...
  • Page 499 After powering up the GOT, touch [Main Menu] [Communication setting] from the Utility. The [Communication setting] appears. Verify that the following communication driver name is displayed in the box for the communication interface to be used. • Communication driver: TOSHIBA PROSEC T/V When the communication driver name is not displayed normally, carry out the...
  • Page 500 12.3.7 Checking for normal monitoring Check for errors occurring on the GOT Presetting the system alarm to project data allows you to identify errors occurred on the GOT, PLC CPU, servo amplifier and communications. For details on the system alarm, refer to the following manual. User’s Manual (When using GT15) Communication...
  • Page 501 Perform an I/O check Whether the PLC can communicate with the GOT or not can be checked by the I/O check function. If this check ends successfully, it means correct communication interface settings and proper cable connection. Display the I/O check screen by [Main Menu] [Debug &...

  • Page 502: Connecting To T2 (Pu224), T2E Or T2N

    12.4 PLC Side Setting TOSHIBA PLC For details of the TOSHIBA PLC, refer to the following manual. User's Manual for the TOSHIBA PLC Model name Refer to T2 (PU224), T2E, T2N Section 12.4.1 PLC CPU T3, T3H Section 12.4.2 model 3000 (S2), model 3000 (S3) Section 12.4.3 12.4.1 Connecting to T2 (PU224), T2E or T2N Switch setting...

  • Page 503: Connecting To T3 Or T3H

    12.4.2 Connecting to T3 or T3H Enter the transmission parameters. Item Setting *1*2 4800bps, 9600bps, 19200bps Transmission speed Data length 7bit Stop bit 2bit Parity bit Even Station No. Indicates only the transmission speeds that can be specified on the GOT side. Specify the transmission speed to match the baud rate of the GOT.

  • Page 504: List Of Functions Added By Version Upgrade

    12.5 List of Functions Added by Version Upgrade The following describes the function added by version upgrade of GT Designer2 or OS. For using the function below, use the GT Designer2 or OS of the stated version or later. Version of GT Item Description Version of OS...
  • Page 505 CONNECTION TO HITACHI PLC 13.1 System Configuration ..page 13-2 This section describes equipment and cables needed when connecting a GOT to a HITACHI PLC. Select a system suitable for your application. 13.2 Connection Cable .
  • Page 506 13.1 System Configuration Select a system configuration suitable for your application. Conventions used in this section Numbers (e.g. ) of System configuration and connection conditions correspond to the numbers (e.g. ) of System equipment. Use these numbers as references when confirming models and applications. 13.1.1 Connecting to large-sized H series Communication driver ·...
  • Page 507 System equipment (1) GOT Image Name Model name RS-232 RS-232 interface (Built into GOT) • For RS-232 communication RS-232 RS-232 RS-232 Communication Unit GT15-RS2-9P • For RS-232 communication RS-232 RS-422 conversion unit GT15-RS2T4-9P • For RS-422 communication RS-422/485 RS-422/485 RS-422/485 Communication Unit GT15-RS4-9S •...
  • Page 508 (3) Cable Image Name Model name *1*2 RS-232 cable 1) GT09-C30R20401-15P(3m) • Between CPU and GOT *1*2 RS-232 cable 2) GT09-C30R20402-15P(3m) • Between CPU and GOT RS-232 cable 1) • Between intelligent serial port GT09-C30R20401-15P(3m) module and GOT GT09-C30R40401-7T(3m) RS-422 cable GT09-C100R40401-7T(10m) •...

  • Page 509: Connecting To H-200 To 252 Series, H Series Board Type Or Eh-150 Series

    13.1.2 Connecting to H-200 to 252 series, H series board type or EH-150 series Communication driver · HITACHI HIDIC H · HITACHI HIDIC H (Protocol2) System configuration and connection conditions Connection conditions System configuration Number of Distance GOTs RS-232 cable 1), 2) 15m or less MAX15m To use "transmission control procedure 2"...

  • Page 510: Connection Cable

    13.2 Connection Cable The RS-232 cable or RS-422 cable used for connecting the GOT to the PLC should be prepared by the user. The following provides connection diagrams for each cable, connector specifications and other information. RS-232 cable connection diagram The connection diagram of the cable to be used varies according to the specified transmission speed.
  • Page 511 13.2.1 RS-232 cable The following shows the connection diagrams and connector specifications of the RS-232 cable used for connecting the GOT to a PLC. Connection diagram (1) RS-232 cable 1) GOT side HITACHI product side Cable connection and signal direction Signal name Pin No.
  • Page 512 Connector specifications (1) GOT side connector Use the following as the RS-232 interface and RS-232 communication unit connector on the GOT. For the GOT side of the RS-232 cable, use a connector or connector cover applicable to the GOT connector. (a) Connector type 9-pin D-sub (male) inch screw fixed type (b) Connector model...
  • Page 513 13.2.2 RS-422 cable The following shows the connection diagrams and connector specifications of the RS-422 cable used for connecting the GOT to a PLC. Connection diagram GOT side HITACHI product side Cable connection and signal direction Signal name Pin No. Name of terminal block TXDP TXDN...
  • Page 514 Precautions when preparing a cable The length of the RS-422 cable must be 200m or less. Connecting terminating resistors When connecting an intelligent serial port module to a GOT, a terminating resistor has to be connected to the intelligent serial port module. The terminating resistor is unnecessary on the GOT side because one is built in the GOT.
  • Page 515 13.3 Preparatory Procedures for Monitoring The following shows the procedures to be taken before monitoring and corresponding reference sections. Section 13.3.1 Install the OS onto the GOT. Installing OS onto GOT Section 13.3.2 Make sure that the OS is installed on the GOT. Checking OS installation on GOT Section 13.3.3 Set the communication interface.
  • Page 516 13.3.1 Installing OS onto GOT Install the standard monitor OS, communication driver and option OS onto the GOT. For the OS installation methods, refer to the following manual. GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual Check either of the following under the Communication driver. ·...
  • Page 517 13.3.2 Checking OS installation on GOT Check if the OS is properly installed or not on the Drive information tab of GT Designer2. For the operation on the Drive information tab, refer to the following manual. GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual The OS had been installed successfully on the GOT if the following can be confirmed: 1) Standard monitor OS...
  • Page 518 13.3.3 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) Make the GOT communication interface settings on [Communication setting] of GT Designer2. Select the same communication driver as the one installed on the GOT for each communication interface. For details on [Communication setting] of GT Designer2, refer to the following manual. GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual Communication settings...
  • Page 519 Communication detail settings (1) HITACHI HIDIC H Item Description Range Set this item when change the transmission speed used for 4800bps, 9600bps, Transmission Speed communication with the connected equipment. 19200bps, 38400bps <Default: 19200bps> Specify whether to use the station No. during communication. Station No.
  • Page 520 (2) HITACHI HIDIC H (Protocol2) Item Description Range Set this item when change the transmission speed used for 4800bps, 9600bps, Transmission Speed communication with the connected equipment. 19200bps, 38400bps <Default: 19200bps> Specify whether to use the station No. during communication. Station No.
  • Page 521 13.3.4 Downloading project data Download project data to the GOT. For how to download project data, refer to the following manual. GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual Check the necessary items and click the button. Download Download 13 - 17 13.3 Preparatory Procedures for Monitoring 13.3.4 Downloading project data...
  • Page 522 13.3.5 Attaching communication unit and connecting cable Cautions when attaching the communication unit and connecting the cable Shut off all phases of the GOT power supply before attaching the communication unit and connecting the cable. Attaching the communication unit Attach the serial communication unit to the extension unit connector on the GOT.
  • Page 523 How to connect the cable (1) How to connect the RS-232 cable (a) For the GT15 • connection to the RS-232 interface Connect the RS-232 cable to the RS-232 interface on the GOT. • connection to the RS-232 communication unit Connect the RS-232 cable to the RS-232 communication unit on the GOT.
  • Page 524 (2) How to connect the RS-422 cable (a) For the GT15 • connection to the RS-232 interface Connect the RS-422 conversion unit to the RS- 232 interface on the GOT. Connect the RS-422 cable to the RS-422 conversion unit. • connection to the RS-422/485 communication unit Connect the RS-232 cable to the RS-232 communication unit on the GOT.
  • Page 525 When using the RS-422 conversion unit On "Communication settings" on the utility, make setting so that 5V DC power is supplied to the RS-422 conversion unit from the RS-232 interface on the GOT. For details on the utility, refer to the following manual: User's Manual Touch [5V supply].
  • Page 526 13.3.6 Verifying GOT recognizes connected equipment Verify the GOT recognizes connected equipments on [Communication setting] of the Utility. • Channel number of communication interface, communication drivers allocation status • Communication unit installation status Remark How to display Utility(at default), utility call key 1-point press on GOT screen upper-left corner When using GT1595-X Utility display...
  • Page 527 After powering up the GOT, touch [Main Menu] [Communication setting] from the Utility. The [Communication setting] appears. Verify that the following communication driver name is displayed in the box for the communication interface to be used. • Communication driver (either of the following) HITACHI HIDIC H HITACHI HIDIC H (Protocol2)
  • Page 528 13.3.7 Checking for normal monitoring Check for errors occurring on the GOT Presetting the system alarm to project data allows you to identify errors occurred on the GOT, PLC CPU, servo amplifier and communications. For details on the system alarm, refer to the following manual. User’s Manual (When using GT15) Communication...
  • Page 529 Perform an I/O check Whether the PLC can communicate with the GOT or not can be checked by the I/O check function. If this check ends successfully, it means correct communication interface settings and proper cable connection. Display the I/O check screen by [Main Menu] [Debug &...
  • Page 530 13.4 PLC Side Setting HITACHI PLC For details of the HITACHI PLC, refer to the following manual. User's Manual for the HITACHI PLC Directly connecting to the CPU Item Setting *1*2*3 4800bps, 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps Transmission speed Station No. Data length 7bit Stop bit 1bit...
  • Page 531 (2) For transmission control procedure2 Item Setting Transmission speed 19200bps Station No. Data length 7bit Stop bit 1bit Pairty bit Even Control procedure None For RS-232 communication: RS-232 MODE switch 9 Communication format For RS-422 communication: RS-422 MODE switch 9 Sum check Performed 13 - 27...
  • Page 532 13.5 List of Functions Added by Version Upgrade The following describes the function added by version upgrade of GT Designer2 or OS. For using the function below, use the GT Designer2 or OS of the stated version or later. Version of GT Item Description Version of OS...
  • Page 533 CONNECTION TO MATSUSHITA PLC 14.1 System Configuration ..page 14-2 This section describes the equipment and cables needed when connecting a GOT to a MATSUSHITA PLC. Select a system suitable for your application. 14.2 Connection Cable .

  • Page 534: System Configuration

    14.1 System Configuration Select a system configuration suitable for your application. Conventions used in this section Numbers (e.g. ) of System configuration and connection conditions correspond to the numbers (e.g. ) of System equipment. Use these numbers as references when confirming models and applications. 14.1.1 Connecting to FP0-C16CT or FP0-C32CT Communication driver MATSUSHITA...
  • Page 535 Image Name Model name RS-232 cable 4) • Between RS232C port of GT09-C30R20904-3C(3m) PLC CPU and GOT *1 The RS-232 cable can be prepared by the user. ( Section 14.2 Connection Cable ) is a product manufactured by Matsushita Electric works, Ltd. For details of this product, contact Matsushita Electric works, Ltd.

  • Page 536: Connecting To Fp1-C24C Or Fp1-C40C

    14.1.2 Connecting to FP1-C24C or FP1-C40C Communication driver MATSUSHITA MEWNET-FP System configuration and connection conditions Connection conditions System configuration Number of Distance GOTs RS422/232C conversion adapter FP peripheral Connect to RS-232 device connection the tool port. cable 1) cable 15.5m or less MAX15.5m Connect to the RS232C port.
  • Page 537 (3) Cable Image Name Model name FP peripheral device connection cable • Between tool port of PLC AFP15205(0.5m) CPU and RS422/232C conversion adapter RS-232 cable 1) • Between RS422/232C conversion adapter and GOT (To be prepared by the user. Section 14.2 Connection Cable RS-232 cable 3) •...

  • Page 538: Connecting To Fp2 Or Fp2Sh

    14.1.3 Connecting to FP2 or FP2SH Communication driver MATSUSHITA MEWNET-FP System configuration and connection conditions Connection conditions System configuration Number of Distance GOTs Connect to the tool port. RS-232 cable 3m or less MAX3m Connect to the RS232C port. RS-232 cable 2) MAX15m 15m or less Computer communication unit...
  • Page 539 System equipment (1) GOT Image Name Model name RS-232 RS-232 interface (Built into GOT) • For RS-232 communication RS-232 RS-232 RS-232 Communication Unit GT15-RS2-9P • For RS-232 communication (2) PLC Image Name Model name Computer communication unit AFP2462 is a product manufactured by Matsushita Electric works, Ltd. For details of this product, contact Matsushita Electric works, Ltd.

  • Page 540: Connecting To Fp3

    14.1.4 Connecting to FP3 Communication driver MATSUSHITA MEWNET-FP System configuration and connection conditions Connection conditions System configuration Number of Distance GOTs RS422/232C conversion adapter FP peripheral Connect to the tool port. device connection RS-232 cable 1) cable 15.5m or less MAX15.5m Computer communication unit RS-232 cable 2)
  • Page 541 System equipment (1) GOT Image Name Model name RS-232 RS-232 interface (Built into GOT) • For RS-232 communication RS-232 RS-232 RS-232 Communication Unit GT15-RS2-9P • For RS-232 communication (2) PLC Image Name Model name RS422/232C conversion AFP8550 adapter computer communication unit AFP3462 are products manufactured by Matsushita Electric works, Ltd.

  • Page 542: Connecting To Fp5

    14.1.5 Connecting to FP5 Communication driver MATSUSHITA MEWNET-FP System configuration and connection conditions Connection conditions System configuration Number of Distance GOTs RS422/232C conversion adapter FP peripheral Connect to the tool port. device connection RS-232 cable 1) cable 15.5m or less MAX15.5m Computer communication unit RS-232 cable 2)
  • Page 543 System equipment (1) GOT Image Name Model name RS-232 RS-232 interface (Built into GOT) • For RS-232 communication RS-232 RS-232 RS-232 Communication Unit GT15-RS2-9P • For RS-232 communication (2) PLC Image Name Model name RS422/232C conversion AFP8550 adapter computer communication unit AFP5462 are products manufactured by Matsushita Electric works, Ltd.

  • Page 544: Connecting To Fp10 (S)

    14.1.6 Connecting to FP10 (S) Communication driver MATSUSHITA MEWNET-FP System configuration and connection conditions Connection conditions System configuration Number of Distance GOTs RS422/232C conversion adapter FP peripheral Connect to the tool port. RS-232 cable 1) device connection cable 15.5m or less MAX15.5m Connect to the RS232C port.
  • Page 545 System equipment (1) GOT Image Name Model name RS-232 RS-232 interface (Built into GOT) • For RS-232 communication RS-232 RS-232 RS-232 Communication Unit GT15-RS2-9P • For RS-232 communication (2) PLC Image Name Model name RS422/232C conversion AFP8550 adapter Computer communication unit AFP3462 are products manufactured by Matsushita Electric works, Ltd.

  • Page 546: Connecting To Fp10Sh

    14.1.7 Connecting to FP10SH Communication driver MATSUSHITA MEWNET-FP System configuration and connection conditions Connection conditions System configuration Number of Distance GOTs Connect to the tool port or RS232C port. RS-232 cable 2) MAX15m 15m or less Computer communication unit RS-232 cable 2) MAX15m System equipment (1) GOT...
  • Page 547 (3) Cable Image Name Model name RS-232 cable 2) • Between tool port of PLC CPU and GOT AFB85853(3m) • Between RS232C port of GT09-C30R20902-9P(3m) PLC CPU and GOT • Between computer communication unit and GOT The RS-232 cable can be prepared by the user. ( Section 14.2 Connection Cable) is a product manufactured by Matsushita Electric works, Ltd.

  • Page 548: Connecting To Fp-M (C20Tc) Or Fp-M (C32Tc)

    14.1.8 Connecting to FP-M (C20TC) or FP-M (C32TC) Communication driver MATSUSHITA MEWNET-FP System configuration and connection conditions Connection conditions System configuration Number of Distance GOTs Connect to the tool port. RS-232 cable 3m or less MAX3m Connect to the RS232C port. RS-232 cable 2 15m or less MAX15m...

  • Page 549: Connecting To Fp Sigma

    14.1.9 Connecting to FP SIGMA Communication driver MATSUSHITA MEWNET-FP System configuration and connection condition Connection conditions System configuration Number of Distance GOTs Connect to the Tool port RS-232 cable 3m or less MAX3m COM port 15m or less RS-232 cable MAX15m COM port 15m or less...
  • Page 550 (2) PLC Image Name Model name COM port AFPG801 COM port AFPG802 are products manufactured by Matsushita Electric works, Ltd. For details of these product, contact Matsushita Electric work, Ltd. (3) Cable Image Name Model name RS-232 cable Between tool port of PLC CPU AFC8503(3m) and GOT RS-232 cable 5)

  • Page 551: Connection Cable

    14.2 Connection Cable The RS-232 cable used for connection between the GOT and PLC needs to be prepared by the user. The following shows each cable connection diagram and relevant connectors. Connection diagram (1) RS-232 cable 1) (between RS422/232C conversion adapter and GOT) Matsushita Electric Works, Ltd.
  • Page 552 (3) RS-232 cable 3) (between RS232C port and GOT (for FP1)) Matsushita Electric Works, Ltd. GOT side product side Cable connection and signal direction Signal name Pin No. Pin No. Signal name CD/NC RD(RXD) SD(TXD) ER(DTR) DR(DSR) RS(RTS) CS(CTS) GT15 : CD, GT11 : NC (4) RS-232 cable 4) (between RS232C port and GOT (for FP0)) Matsushita Electric Works, Ltd.
  • Page 553 (5) RS-232 cable 5) (between COM port of PLC CPU and GOT) Matsushita Electric Works, Ltd. GOT side product side Cable connection and signal direction Signal name Pin No. Pin name RD(RXD) SD(TXD) ER(DTR) DR(DSR) RS(RTS) CS(CTS) (6) RS-232 cable 6 (between COM port of PLC CPU and GOT) Matsushita Electric Works, Ltd.
  • Page 554 Connector specifications (1) GOT side connector Use the following as the RS-232 interface and RS-232 communication unit connector on the GOT. For the GOT side of the RS-232 cable, use a connector or connector cover applicable to the GOT connector. (a) Connector type 9-pin D-sub (male) inch screw fixed type (b) Connector model...

  • Page 555: Preparatory Procedures For Monitoring

    14.3 Preparatory Procedures for Monitoring The following shows the procedures to be taken before monitoring and corresponding reference sections. Section 14.3.1 Install the OS onto the GOT. Installing OS onto GOT Section 14.3.2 Make sure that the OS is installed on the GOT. Checking OS installation on GOT Section 14.3.3 Set the communication interface.

  • Page 556: Installing Os Onto Got

    14.3.1 Installing OS onto GOT Install the standard monitor OS, communication driver and option OS onto the GOT. For the OS installation methods, refer to the following manual. GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual Check the following under the communication driver. •...

  • Page 557: Checking Os Installation On Got

    14.3.2 Checking OS installation on GOT Check if the OS is properly installed or not on the Drive information tab of GT Designer2. For the operation on the Drive information tab, refer to the following manual. GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual The OS has been installed successfully on the GOT if the following can be confirmed: 1) Standard monitor OS...

  • Page 558: Setting Communication Interface (Communication Settings)

    14.3.3 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) Make the GOT communication interface settings on [Communication setting] of GT Designer2. Select the same communication driver as the one installed on the GOT for each communication interface. For details on [Communication setting] of GT Designer2, refer to the following manual. GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual Communication settings...
  • Page 559 Communication detail settings Item Description Range Set this item when change the transmission speed used for 4800bps, 9600bps, Transmission Speed communication with the connected equipment. 19200bps, 38400bps <Default: 9600bps> 57600bps, 115200bps Set this item when change the data length used for communication Data Bit with the connected equipment.

  • Page 560: Downloading Project Data

    14.3.4 Downloading project data Download project data to the GOT. For how to download project data, refer to the following manual. GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual Check the necessary items and click the button. Download Download 14 - 28 14.3 Preparatory Procedures for Monitoring 14.3.4 Downloading project data...

  • Page 561: Attaching Communication Unit And Connecting Cable

    14.3.5 Attaching communication unit and connecting cable Cautions when attaching the communication unit and connecting the cable Shut off all phases of the GOT power supply before attaching the communication unit and connecting the cable. Attaching the communication unit Attach the serial communication unit to the extension unit connector on the GOT.
  • Page 562 How to connect the cable (1) How to connect the RS-232 cable (a) For the GT15 • connection to the RS-232 interface Connect the RS-232 cable to the RS-232 interface on the GOT. •connection to the RS-232 communication unit Connect the RS-232 cable to the RS-232 communication unit on the GOT.

  • Page 563: Verifying Got Recognizes Connected Equipment

    14.3.6 Verifying GOT recognizes connected equipment Verify the GOT recognizes connected equipments on [Communication setting] of the Utility. • Channel number of communication interface, communication drivers allocation status • Communication unit installation status Remark How to display Utility(at default), utility call key 1-point press on GOT screen upper-left corner When using GT1595-X Utility display...
  • Page 564 After powering up the GOT, touch [Main Menu] [Communication setting] from the Utility. The [Communication setting] appears. Verify that the following communication driver name is displayed in the box for the communication interface to be used. • Communication driver: MATSUSHITA MEWNET-FP When the communication driver name is not displayed normally, carry out the...

  • Page 565: Checking For Normal Monitoring

    14.3.7 Checking for normal monitoring Check for errors occurring on the GOT Presetting the system alarm to project data allows you to identify errors occurred on the GOT, PLC CPU, servo amplifier and communications. For details on the system alarm, refer to the following manual. User’s Manual (When using GT15) Communication...
  • Page 566 Perform an I/O check Whether the PLC can communicate with the GOT or not can be checked by the I/O check function. If this check ends successfully, it means correct communication interface settings and proper cable connection. Display the I/O check screen by [Main Menu] [Debug &...

  • Page 567: Plc Side Setting

    14.4 PLC Side Setting MATSUSHITA PLC For details of the MATSUSHITA PLC, refer to the following manual. User's Manual for the MATSUSHITA PLC. Connecting to the tool port of the PLC CPU Item Setting *1*2*3 4800bps, 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps, 115200bps Transmission speed Data length 8bit...
  • Page 568 Connecting to the computer communication unit Item Setting *1*2*3 4800bps, 9600bps, 19200bps Transmission speed Data length 8bit Stop bit 1bit Parity bit Parity check Control signal Invalidate CS, CD Indicates only the transmission speeds that can be set on the GOT side. Set the same transmission speed of the GOT.

  • Page 569: List Of Functions Added By Version Upgrade

    14.5 List of Functions Added by Version Upgrade The following describes the function added by version upgrade of GT Designer2 or OS. For using the function below, use the GT Designer2 or OS of the stated version or later. Version of GT Item Description Version of OS...
  • Page 570 MEMO 14 - 38...
  • Page 571 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 15.1 System Configuration ..page 15-2 This section describes the equipment and cables needed when connecting a GOT to a YASKAWA PLC. Select a system suitable for your application. 15.2 Connection Cable .
  • Page 572 15.1 System Configuration Select a system configuration suitable for your application. Conventions used in this section Numbers (e.g. ) of System configuration and connection conditions correspond to the numbers (e.g. ) of System equipment. Use these numbers as references when confirming models and applications. 15.1.1 Connecting to GL120, GL130 Communication driver YASKAWA GL/CP9200(SH/H)/CP9300MS...
  • Page 573 System equipment (1) GOT Image Name Model name RS-232 RS-232 interface (Built into GOT) • For RS-232 communication RS-232 RS-232 RS-232 Communication Unit GT15-RS2-9P • For RS-232 communication RS-232 RS-422 conversion unit GT15-RS2T4-9P • For RS-422 communication RS-422/485 RS-422/485 RS-422/485 Communication Unit GT15-RS4-9S •...

  • Page 574: Connecting To Gl60S, Gl60H, Gl70H

    15.1.2 Connecting to GL60S, GL60H, GL70H Communication driver YASKAWA GL/CP9200(SH/H)/CP9300MS System configuration and connection conditions Connection conditions System configuration No. of GOTs Distance MEMOBUS module RS-232 cable 1) Differs according to PLC side specifications. MEMOBUS module RS-422 cable 1) 15 - 4 15.1 System Configuration 15.1.2 Connecting to GL60S, GL60H, GL70H...
  • Page 575 System equipment (1) GOT Image Name Model name RS-232 RS-232 interface (Built into GOT) • For RS-232 communication RS-232 RS-232 RS-232 Communication Unit GT15-RS2-9P • For RS-232 communication RS-232 RS-422 conversion unit GT15-RS2T4-9P • For RS-422 communication RS-422/485 RS-422/485 RS-422/485 Communication Unit GT15-RS4-9S •...
  • Page 576 15.1.3 Connecting to MP-920/930, CP-9300MS/9200(H), PROGIC-8 Communication driver YASKAWA GL/CP9200(SH/H)/CP9300MS System configuration and connection conditions When connecting to MP-920, MP-930, CP9200(H), PROGIC-8 (port 1) Connection conditions System configuration No. of GOTs Distance Differs according to RS-232 cable 1) PLC side specifications.
  • Page 577 (2) Cable Image Name Model name RS-232 cable 1) GT09-C30R20201-9P(3m) • Between CPU and GOT RS-232 cable 2) GT09-C30R20202-15P(3m) • Between CPU and GOT RS-232 cable 3) GT09-C30R20203-9P(3m) • Between CPU and GOT *1 The RS-232 cable can be prepared by the user.( Section 15.2 Connection Cable) *2 When connecting the CP9200 (N), prepare the RS-232 cable.
  • Page 578 15.1.4 Connecting to MP-940 Communication driver YASKAWA GL/CP9200(SH/H)/CP9300MS System configuration and connection conditions Connection conditions System configuration No. of GOTs Distance Differs according to RS-232 cable 4) PLC side specifications. RS-422 cable 2) 300m or less System equipment (1) GOT Image Name Model name...
  • Page 579 Image Name Model name RS-232 cable 4) GT09-C30R20204-14P(3m) • Between CPU and GOT GT09-C30R40202-14P(3m) GT09-C100R40202-14P(10m) RS-422 cable 2) GT09-C200R40202-14P(20m) • Between CPU and GOT GT09-C300R40202-14P(30m) *1 The RS-232 and RS-422 cable can be prepared by the user. Section 15.2 Connection Cable) 15 - 9 15.1 System Configuration 15.1.4 Connecting to MP-940...

  • Page 580: Connecting To Cp-9200Sh

    15.1.5 Connecting to CP-9200SH Communication driver YASKAWA GL/CP9200(SH/H)/CP9300MS System configuration and connection conditions Connection conditions System configuration No. of GOTs Distance MEMOBUS module (CN1 connection) RS-232 cable 3) Differs according to PLC side specifications. MEMOBUS module (CN2 connection) RS-232 cable 5) System equipment (1) GOT Image...
  • Page 581 (3) Cable Image Name Model name RS-232 cable 3) GT09-C30R20203-9P(3m) • Between MEMOBUS module (CN1 connection) and GOT RS-232 cable 5) GT09-C30R20205-25P(3m) • Between MEMOBUS module (CN2 connection) and GOT *1 The RS-232 cable can be prepared by the user. Section 15.2 Connection Cable) 15 - 11 15.1 System Configuration...
  • Page 582 15.2 Connection Cable The RS-232 cable or RS-422 cable used for connecting the GOT to the PLC should be prepared by the user. The following provides connection diagrams for each cable, connector specifications and other information. Connection cable Model RS-232 cable RS-422 cable (See Section 15.2.1) (See Section 15.2.2)
  • Page 583 15.2.1 RS-232 cable The following shows the connection diagrams and connector specifications of the RS-232 cable used for connecting the GOT to a PLC. Connection diagram (1) RS-232 cable 1) GOT side YASKAWA product side Cable connection and signal direction Signal name Pin No.
  • Page 584 (3) RS-232 cable 3) GOT side YASKAWA product side Cable connection and signal direction Signal name Pin No. Pin No. Signal name CD/NC RD(RXD) SD(TXD) ER(DTR) OP/CTS DR(DSR) RS(RTS) CS(CTS) GT15: CD, GT11: NC (4) RS-232 cable 4) GOT side YASKAWA product side Cable connection and signal direction Signal name...
  • Page 585 Connector specifications (1) GOT side connector Use the following as the RS-232 interface and RS-232 communication unit connector on the GOT. For the GOT side of the RS-232 cable, use a connector or connector cover applicable to the GOT connector. (a) Connector type 9-pin D-sub (male) inch screw fixed type (b) Connector model...
  • Page 586 15.2.2 RS-422 cable The following shows the connection diagrams and connector specifications of the RS-422 cable used for connecting the GOT to a PLC. Connection diagram (1) RS-422 cable 1) GOT side YASKAWA product side Cable connection and signal direction Signal name Pin No.
  • Page 587 Connector specifications (1) GOT side connector Use the following as the RS-422 interface and RS-422/485 communication unit connector on the GOT. For the GOT side of the RS-422 cable, use a connector and connector cover applicable to the GOT connector. (a) Connector type 9-pin D-sub (female) (b) Connector model...
  • Page 588 15.3 Preparatory Procedure for Monitoring The following shows the procedures to be taken before monitoring and corresponding reference sections. Section 15.3.1 Install the OS onto the GOT. Installing OS onto GOT Section 15.3.2 Make sure that the OS is installed on the GOT. Checking OS installation on GOT Section 15.3.3 Set the communication interface.
  • Page 589 15.3.1 Installing OS onto GOT Install the standard monitor OS, communication driver and option OS onto the GOT. For the OS installation methods, refer to the following manual. GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual Check the following under the Communication driver. •...
  • Page 590 15.3.2 Checking OS installation on GOT Check if the OS is properly installed or not on the Drive information tab of GT Designer2. For the operation on the Drive information tab, refer to the following manual. GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual The OS has been installed successfully on the GOT if the following can be confirmed: 1) Standard monitor OS...
  • Page 591 15.3.3 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) Make the GOT communication interface settings on [Communication setting] of GT Designer2. Select the same communication driver as the one installed on the GOT for each communication interface. For details on [Communication setting] of GT Designer2, refer to the following manual. GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual Communication settings...
  • Page 592 Communication detail settings Item Description Range Set this item when change the transmission speed used for com- 4800bps, 9600bps, 19200bps, Transmission Speed munication with the connected equipment. 38400bps, 57600bps <Default: 19200bps> Specify the time period from the GOT startup until GOT starts the Startup Time communication with the PLC CPU.
  • Page 593 (1) Delay time When connecting to PLC CP-9200(H) and CP-9300MS, set the following. Model name Delay time CP-9200(H) 30ms or more port:0 10ms or more CP-9300MS port:1 30ms or more (2) Communication interface setting by Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility's "Communication setting"...
  • Page 594 15.3.4 Downloading project data Download project data to the GOT. For how to download project data, refer to the following manual. GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual Check the necessary items and click the button. Download Download 15 - 24 15.3 Preparatory Procedure for Monitoring 15.3.4 Downloading project data...
  • Page 595 15.3.5 Attaching communication unit and connecting cable Cautions when attaching the communication unit and connecting the cable Shut off all phases of the GOT power supply before attaching the communication unit and connecting the cable. Attaching the communication unit Attach the serial communication unit to the extension unit connector on the GOT.
  • Page 596 How to connect the cable (1) How to connect the RS-232 cable (a) For the GT15 • connection to the RS-232 interface Connect the RS-232 cable to the RS-232 interface on the GOT. • connection to the RS-232 communication unit Connect the RS-232 cable to the RS-232 communication unit on the GOT.
  • Page 597 (2) How to connect the RS-422 cable (a) For the GT15 • connection to the RS-232 interface Connect the RS-422 conversion unit to the RS- 232 interface on the GOT. Connect the RS-422 cable to the RS-422 conversion unit. • connection to the RS-422/485 communication unit Connect the RS-232 cable to the RS-232 communication unit on the GOT.
  • Page 598 When using the RS-422 conversion unit On "Communication settings" on the utility, make setting so that 5V DC power is supplied to the RS-422 conversion unit from the RS-232 interface on the GOT. For details on the utility, refer to the following manual: User's Manual Touch [5V supply].
  • Page 599 15.3.6 Verifying GOT recognizes connected equipment Verify the GOT recognizes connected equipments on [Communication setting] of the Utility. • Channel number of communication interface, communication drivers allocation status • Communication unit installation status Remark How to display Utility(at default), utility call key 1-point press on GOT screen upper-left corner When using GT1595-X Utility display...
  • Page 600 After powering up the GOT, touch [Main Menu] [Communication setting] from the Utility. The [Communication setting] appears. Verify that the following communication driver name is displayed in the box for the communication interface to be used. • Communication driver : YASKAWA GL When the communication driver name is not displayed normally, carry out the following procedure again.
  • Page 601 15.3.7 Checking for normal monitoring Check for errors occurring on the GOT. Presetting the system alarm to project data allows you to identify errors occurred on the GOT, PLC CPU, servo amplifier and communications. For details on the system alarm, refer to the following manual. User’s Manual (When using GT15) Communication...
  • Page 602 Perform an I/O check. Whether the PLC can communicate with the GOT or not can be checked by the I/O check function. If this check ends successfully, it means correct communication interface settings and proper cable connection. Display the I/O check screen by [Main Menu] [Debug &...
  • Page 603 15.4 PLC Side Setting YASKAWA PLC For details of YASKAWA PLCs, refer to the following manuals. Manuals for YASKAWA PLCs Communication and port settings Make the communication and port settings with a peripheral tool. Device Name Settings 1 to 31 Address Protocol MEMOBUS...
  • Page 604 MEMO 15 - 34...
  • Page 605 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC 16.1 System Configuration ..page 16-2 This section describes the equipment and cables needed when connecting a GOT to a YOKOGAWA PLC. Select a system suitable for your application. 16.2 Connection Cable .
  • Page 606 16.1 System Configuration Select a system configuration suitable for your application. Conventions used in this section Numbers (e.g. ) of System configuration and connection conditions correspond to the numbers (e.g. ) of System equipment. Use these numbers as references when confirming models and applications. 16.1.1 Connecting to FA-M3 Communication driver YOKOGAWA FA500/FA-M3...
  • Page 607 System equipment (1) GOT Image Name Model name RS-232 RS-232 interface (Built into GOT) • For RS-232 communication RS-232 RS-232 RS-232 Communication Unit GT15-RS2-9P • For RS-232 communication RS-232 RS-422 conversion unit GT15-RS2T4-9P • For RS-422 communication RS-422/485 RS-422/485 RS-422/485 Communication Unit GT15-RS4-9S •...
  • Page 608 (3) Cable Image Name Model name CPU port/D-Sub 9-pin KM10-0C conversion cable RS-232 cable 1) • Between CPU port/D-Sub 9- GT09-C30R20301-9P(3m) pin conversion cable and RS-232 cable 2) GT09-C30R20302-9P(3m) • Between PC link module and GT09-C30R40301-6T(3m) RS-422 cable 1) GT09-C100R40301-6T(10m) •...
  • Page 609 16.1.2 Connecting to FA500 Communication driver YOKOGAWA FA500/FA-M3 System configuration and connection conditions Connection conditions System configuration No. of GOTs Distance PC link module 15m or less RS-232 cable 3) MAX15m PC link module 1200m or less RS-422 cable 2) MAX1200m 16 - 5 16.1 System Configuration...
  • Page 610 System equipment (1) GOT Image Name Model name RS-232 RS-232 interface (Built into GOT) • For RS-232 communication RS-232 RS-232 RS-232 Communication Unit GT15-RS2-9P • For RS-232 communication RS-232 RS-422 conversion unit GT15-RS2T4-9P • For RS-422 communication RS-422/485 RS-422/485 RS-422/485 Communication Unit GT15-RS4-9S •...
  • Page 611 16.2 Connection Cable The RS-232 cable or RS-422 cable used for connecting the GOT to the PLC should be prepared by the user. The following provides connection diagrams for each cable, connector specifications and other information. Connection cable Model RS-232 cable RS-422 cable (See Section 16.2.1) (See Section 16.2.2)
  • Page 612 16.2.1 RS-232 cable The following shows the connection diagrams and connector specifications of the RS-232 cable used for connecting the GOT to a PLC. Connection diagram (1) RS-232 cable 1) GOT side YOKOGAWA product side Cable connection and signal direction Signal name Pin No.
  • Page 613 (3) RS-232 cable 3) GOT side YOKOGAWA product side Cable connection and signal direction Signal name Pin No. Pin No. Signal name CD/NC RD(RXD) SD(TXD) ER(DTR) DR(DSR) RS(RTS) CS(CTS) *1 GT15:CD, GT11:NC Connector specifications (1) GOT side connector Use the following as the RS-232 interface and RS-232 communication unit connector on the GOT. For the GOT side of the RS-232 cable, use a connector or connector cover applicable to the GOT connector.
  • Page 614 Precautions when preparing a cable The length of cables RS-232 2) and 3) must be 15m or less. The length of the cable RS-232 1) must not exceed 15m including the CPU port/D-Sub 9-pin conversion cable length. 16 - 10 16.2 Connection Cable 16.2.1 RS-232 cable...
  • Page 615 16.2.2 RS-422 cable The following shows the connection diagrams and connector specifications of the RS-422 cable used for connecting the GOT to a PLC. Differences in polarity between GOT and YOKOGAWA products The polarity of poles A and B in signal names is reversed between GOT and YOKOGAWA products.
  • Page 616 Connector specifications (1) GOT side connector Use the following as the RS-422 interface and RS-422/485 communication unit connector on the GOT. For the GOT side of the RS-422 cable, use a connector and connector cover applicable to the GOT connector. (a) Connector type 9-pin D-sub (female) (b) Connector model...
  • Page 617 16.3 Preparatory Procedure for Monitoring The following shows the procedures to be taken before monitoring and corresponding reference sections. Section 16.3.1 Install the OS onto the GOT. Installing OS onto GOT Section 16.3.2 Make sure that the OS is installed on the GOT. Checking OS installation on GOT Section 16.3.3 Setting the communication interface (Communication...
  • Page 618 16.3.1 Installing OS onto GOT Install the standard monitor OS, communication driver and option OS onto the GOT. For the OS installation methods, refer to the following manual. GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual Check the following under the Communication driver. •...
  • Page 619 16.3.2 Checking OS installation on GOT Check if the OS is properly installed or not on the Drive information tab of GT Designer2. For the operation on the Drive information tab, refer to the following manual. GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual The OS has been installed successfully on the GOT if the following can be confirmed: 1) Standard monitor OS...
  • Page 620 16.3.3 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) Make the GOT communication interface settings on [Communication setting] of GT Designer2. Select the same communication driver as the one installed on the GOT for each communication interface. For details on [Communication setting] of GT Designer2, refer to the following manual. GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual Communication settings...
  • Page 621 Communication detail settings Item Description Range Set this item when change the transmission speed used for 4800bps, 9600bps, 19200bps, Transmission Speed communication with the connected equipment. 38400bps, 57600bps, <Default: 9600bps> 115200bps Set this item when change the data length used for commu- Data Bit nication with the connected equipment.
  • Page 622 (1) Communication interface setting by Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility's "Communication setting" after downloading "Communication setting" of project data. For details on the Utility, refer to the following manual. User's Manual (2) Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer or the Utility, the latest setting is effective.
  • Page 623 16.3.4 Downloading project data Download project data to the GOT. For how to download project data, refer to the following manual. GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual Check the necessary items and click the button. Download Download 16 - 19 16.3 Preparatory Procedure for Monitoring 16.3.4 Downloading project data...
  • Page 624 16.3.5 Attaching communication unit and connecting cable Cautions when attaching the communication unit and connecting the cable Shut off all phases of the GOT power supply before attaching the communication unit and connecting the cable. Attaching the communication unit Attach the serial communication unit to the extension unit connector on the GOT.
  • Page 625 How to connect the cable (1) How to connect the RS-232 cable (a) For the GT15 • connection to the RS-232 interface Connect the RS-232 cable to the RS-232 interface on the GOT. • connection to the RS-232 communication unit Connect the RS-232 cable to the RS-232 communication unit on the GOT.
  • Page 626 (2) How to connect the RS-422 cable (a) For the GT15 • connection to the RS-232 interface Connect the RS-422 conversion unit to the RS- 232 interface on the GOT. Connect the RS-422 cable to the RS-422 conversion unit. • connection to the RS-422/485 communication unit Connect the RS-232 cable to the RS-232 communication unit on the GOT.
  • Page 627 When using the RS-422 conversion unit On "Communication settings" on the utility, make setting so that 5V DC power is supplied to the RS-422 conversion unit from the RS-232 interface on the GOT. For details on the utility, refer to the following manual: User's Manual Touch [5V supply].
  • Page 628 16.3.6 Verifying GOT recognizes connected equipment Verify the GOT recognizes connected equipments on [Communication setting] of the Utility. • Channel number of communication interface, communication drivers allocation status • Communication unit installation status Remark How to display Utility(at default), utility call key 1-point press on GOT screen upper-left corner When using GT1595-X Utility display...
  • Page 629 After powering up the GOT, touch [Main Menu] [Communication setting] from the Utility. The [Communication setting] appears. Verify that the following communication driver name is displayed in the box for the communication interface to be used. • Communication driver: YOKOGAWA FA500/FA-M3 When the communication driver name is not displayed normally, carry out the...
  • Page 630 16.3.7 Checking for normal monitoring Check for errors occurring on the GOT. Presetting the system alarm to project data allows you to identify errors occurred on the GOT, PLC CPU, servo amplifier and communications. For details on the system alarm, refer to the following manual. User’s Manual (When using GT15) Communication...
  • Page 631 Perform an I/O check. Whether the PLC can communicate with the GOT or not can be checked by the I/O check function. If this check ends successfully, it means correct communication interface settings and proper cable connection. Display the I/O check screen by [Main Menu] [Debug &...
  • Page 632 16.4 PLC Side Setting YOKOGAWA PLC For details of YOKOGAWA PLCs, refer to the following manuals. Manuals for YOKOGAWA PLCs Model Reference CPU port/D-Sub 9-pin conversion cable KM10-0C Section 16.4.1 F3LC01-1N F3LC11-1N Section 16.4.2 F3LC11-2N PC link module F3LC11-1F Section 16.4.3 F3LC12-1F LC01-0N Section 16.4.4...
  • Page 633 16.4.1 Connecting CPU port/D-sub 9-pin conversion cable Setting of PLC CPU Make the PLC CPU settings, displaying [Configuration] [Communication setting] with the program development tool or the ladder-programming tool. Item Setting Set the communication mode of the CPU (transmission speed and data format). Set the transmission speed and data format according to settings of the transmission speed, data length, parity and stop bit on the GOT side.

  • Page 634: Connecting Pc Link Module (F3Lc01-1N, F3Lc11-1N, F3Lc11-2N)

    16.4.2 Connecting PC link module (F3LC01-1N, F3LC11-1N, F3LC11-2N) Switch setting on the PC link module Set the switches accordingly. Switch setting Set the switches before mounting the PC link module to the base unit. F3LC01-1N,F3LC11-1N F3LC11-2N STATION Side view indicated by A TERMINATOR 4-WIRE With right side cover...
  • Page 635 (3) Station No. switch (F3LC11-2N only) Rotary switch Description Setting Station No. (10's digit) Station No. (1's digit) (4) Terminator switch (F3LC11-2N only) Setting Description 4-WIRE Resistor connected (4-wire type) 16 - 31 16.4 PLC Side Setting 16.4.2 Connecting PC link module (F3LC01-1N, F3LC11-1N, F3LC11-2N)

  • Page 636: Connecting Pc Link Module (F3Lc11-1F, F3Lc12-1F)

    16.4.3 Connecting PC link module (F3LC11-1F, F3LC12-1F) Switch setting on the PC link module Set the switches accordingly. Switch setting Set the switches before mounting the PC link module to the base unit. F3LC11-1F F3LC12-1F Side view indicated by A With right side cover removed (1) Transmission speed switch (SW1)
  • Page 637 (3) Module function switch (SW3) Switch No. Description Setting User setting 1 to 6 inhibited Modem compatibility OFF (not compatible) External modem OFF (none) 16 - 33 16.4 PLC Side Setting 16.4.3 Connecting PC link module (F3LC11-1F, F3LC12-1F)

  • Page 638: Connecting Pc Link Module (Lc01-0N, Lc02-0N)

    16.4.4 Connecting PC link module (LC01-0N, LC02-0N) Switch setting on the PC link module Set the switches accordingly. Switch setting Set the switches before mounting the PC link module to the base unit. LC01-0N LC02-0N Front Rear Front Rear STATION NO. (1) Transmission speed switch Set the same transmission speed as that of the GOT side.
  • Page 639 (3) Station No. switch (LC02-0N only) Setting Rotary Switch Description RS-232 RS-422 communication communication STATION NO. Station No. (10's digit) Station No. (1's digit) 16 - 35 16.4 PLC Side Setting 16.4.4 Connecting PC link module (LC01-0N, LC02-0N)

  • Page 640: Precautions

    16.5 Precautions Device range When performing monitoring with the GOT connected to a YOKOGAWA PLC and setting devices for objects, use devices within the device range of the YOKOGAWA PLC. When a device outside the range is set on an object, an indefinite value is displayed on the object. (No error is displayed in the system alarm.) For details on the device range of YOKOGAWA PLCs, refer to the following manual: User's Manual for the YOKOGAWA PLC...
  • Page 641 CONNECTION TO ALLEN-BRADLEY 17.1 System Configuration ..page 17-2 This section describes the equipment and cables needed when connecting a GOT to an Allen-Bradley PLC. Select a system suitable for your application. 17.2 Connection Cable .
  • Page 642 17.1 System Configuration Select a system configuration suitable for your application. Conventions used in this section Numbers (e.g. ) of System configuration and connection conditions correspond to the numbers (e.g. ) of System equipment. Use these numbers as references when confirming models and applications. 17 - 2 17.1 System Configuration...
  • Page 643 17.1.1 Connecting to SLC500 Series Communication driver AB SLC500, AB 1:N System configuration and connection conditions Connection conditions System configuration No. of GOTs Distance RS-232 cable 1) MAX15m 15m or less DH485 network Adapter RS-232 cable 2) MAX15m System equipment (1) GOT Image Name...
  • Page 644 (3) Cable Image Name Model RS-232 cable 1) GT09-C30R20701-9S(3m) • Between CPU and GOT RS-232 cable 2) (To be prepared by the user. Section 17.2 Connection Cable) • Between Adapter and GOT *1 The RS-232 cable can be prepared by the user. ( Section 17.2 Connection Cable 17 - 4 17.1 System Configuration...

  • Page 645: Connecting To Micrologix1000/1200/1500 Series

    17.1.2 Connecting to MicroLogix1000/1200/1500 Series Communication driver AB MicroLogix System configuration and connection conditions Connection conditions System configuration No. of GOTs Distance RS-232 cable 3) MAX15m 15m or less DH485 network Adapter RS-232 cable 2) MAX15m System equipment (1) GOT Image Name Model name...
  • Page 646 (3) Cable Image Name Model name RS-232 cable 3) (To be prepared by the user. Section 17.2 Connection Cable) • Between CPU and GOT RS-232 cable 2) GT09-C30R20702-9P(3m) • Between Adapter and GOT *1 The RS-232 cable can be prepared by the user.( Section 17.2 Connection Cable) 17 - 6 17.1 System Configuration...
  • Page 647 17.2 Connection Cable The RS-232 cable used for connection between the GOT and PLC needs to be prepared by the user. The following shows each cable connection diagram and relevant connectors. Connection diagram (1) RS-232 cable 1) (between CPU (SLC500 Series) and GOT) GOT side Allen-Bradley product side Cable connection and signal direction...
  • Page 648 (3) RS-232 cable 3) (between CPU (MicroLogix1000/1200/1500 Series) and GOT) GOT side Allen-Bradley product side Cable connection and signal direction Signal name Pin No. Pin No. Signal name CD/NC RD(RXD) SD(TXD) ER(DTR) DR(DSR) RS(RTS) CS(CTS) GT15: CD, GT11, NC 17 - 8 17.2 Connection Cable...
  • Page 649 Connector specifications (1) GOT side connector Use the following as the RS-232 interface and RS-232 communication unit connector on the GOT. For the GOT side of the RS-232 cable, use a connector or connector cover applicable to the GOT connector. (a) Connector type 9-pin D-sub (male) inch screw fixed type (b) Connector model...
  • Page 650 17.3 Preparatory Procedures for Monitoring The following shows the procedures to be taken before monitoring and corresponding reference sections. Section 17.3.1 Install the OS onto the GOT. Installing OS onto the GOT Section 17.3.2 Make sure that the OS is installed on the GOT. Checking OS installation on GOT Section 17.3.3 Setting the communication interface (Communication...
  • Page 651 17.3.1 Installing OS onto the GOT Install the standard monitor OS, communication driver and option OS onto the GOT. For the OS installation methods, refer to the following manual. GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual Check eithr of the following on the communication driver. •...
  • Page 652 17.3.2 Checking OS installation on GOT Check if the OS is properly installed or not on the Drive information tab of GT Designer2. For the operation on the Drive information tab, refer to the following manual. GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual The OS has been installed successfully on the GOT if the following can be confirmed: 1) Standard monitor OS...
  • Page 653 17.3.3 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) Make the GOT communication interface settings on [Communication setting] of GT Designer2. Select the same communication driver as the one installed on the GOT for each communication interface. For details on [Communication setting] of GT Designer2, refer to the following manual. GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual Communication settings...
  • Page 654 Communication detail settingss (1) AB SLC500, AB 1:N Item Description Range Set this item when change the transmission speed used for 4800bps, 9600bps, Transmission Speed communication with the connected equipment. 19200bps <Default: 19200bps> Specify the adapter address (station No. of the PLC that the Adapter Address GOT will monitor) in the connected network.
  • Page 655 (2) AB MicroLogix Item Description Range Set this item when change the transmission speed used for 4800bps, 9600bps, Transmission Speed communication with the connected equipment. 19200bps, 38400bps <Default: 19200bps> Specify the format in which the sum check is performed Sum Check Type during communication when performing sum check.
  • Page 656 17.3.4 Downloading project data Download project data to the GOT. For how to download project data, refer to the following manual. GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual Check the necessary items and click the button. Download Download 17 - 16 17.3 Preparatory Procedures for Monitoring 17.3.4 Downloading project data...
  • Page 657 17.3.5 Attaching communication unit and connecting cable Cautions when attaching the communication unit and connecting the cable Shut off all phases of the GOT power supply before attaching the communication unit and connecting the cable. Attaching the communication unit Attach the serial communication unit to the extension unit connector on the GOT.
  • Page 658 How to connect the cable (1) How to connect the RS-232 cable (a) For the GT15 • connection to the RS-232 interface Connect the RS-232 cable to the RS-232 interface on the GOT. •connection to the RS-232 communication unit Connect the RS-232 cable to the RS-232 communication unit on the GOT.
  • Page 659 17.3.6 Verifying GOT recognizes connected equipment Verify the GOT recognizes connected equipments on [Communication setting] of the Utility. • Channel number of communication interface, communication drivers allocation status • Communication unit installation status Remark How to display Utility(at default), utility call key 1-point press on GOT screen upper-left corner When using GT1595-X Utility display...
  • Page 660 After powering up the GOT, touch [Main Menu] [Communication setting] from the Utility. The [Communication setting] appears. Verify that the following communication driver name is displayed in the box for the communication interface to be used. • Communication driver (one of the following) AB SLC500, AB 1:N AB MicroLogix...
  • Page 661 17.3.7 Checking for normal monitoring Check for errors occurring on the GOT. Presetting the system alarm to project data allows you to identify errors occurred on the GOT, PLC CPU, servo amplifier and communications. For details on the system alarm, refer to the following manual. User’s Manual (When using GT15) Communication...
  • Page 662 Perform an I/O check. Whether the PLC can communicate with the GOT or not can be checked by the I/O check function. If this check ends successfully, it means correct communication interface settings and proper cable connection. Display the I/O check screen by [Main Menu] [Debug &...
  • Page 663 Allen-Bradley PLC For details of Allen-Bradley PLCs, refer to the following manuals. Manuals for Allen-Bradley PLCs Direct CPU connection (setting of Allen-Bradley PLC) Setting details Item SLC500 Series MicroLogix1000/1200/1500 Series 4800bps, 9600bps, 19200bps 4800bps, 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps Baud Rate Parity EVEN NONE Control Line...
  • Page 664 Connecting to DH485 network via adapter (1770-KF3) (Setting of Adapter) Item Setting details 4800bps, 9600bps, 19200bps Baud Rate Parity Even Flow Control Disable (No Handshaking) DF1 Device Category DF1 half-duplex slave, local mode Error Detection DH-485 Baud Rate 19200bps Maximum Node Address 1 to 31 DH-485 Node Address 0 to 31...
  • Page 665 CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC 18.1 System Configuration ..page 18-2 This section describes the equipment and cables needed when connecting a GOT to a SIEMENS PLC. Select a system suitable for your application. 18.2 Connection Cable .
  • Page 666 18.1 System Configuration Select a system configuration suitable for your application. Conventions used in this section Numbers (e.g. ) of System configuration and connection conditions correspond to the numbers (e.g. ) of System equipment. Use these numbers as references when confirming models and applications. 18 - 2 18.1 System Configuration...
  • Page 667 18.1.1 Connecting to a SIMATIC S7-300/400 Series Communication driver SIEMENS S7-300/400 System configuration and connection conditions Connection conditions System configuration No. of GOTs Distance Adapter RS-232 cable MAX15m 15m or less PROFIBUS Adapter RS-232 cable MAX15m System equipment (1) GOT Image Name Model name...

  • Page 668: Connecting To A Simatic S7-200 Series

    18.1.2 Connecting to a SIMATIC S7-200 Series Communication driver SIEMENS S7-200 System configurations and connection conditions Connection condition System configuration Number of Distance GOTs Adapter 15m or less System equipment (1) GOT Image Name Model name RS-232 RS-232 interface (Built into GOT) •...
  • Page 669 18.2 Connection Cable The RS-232 cable used for connection between the GOT and PLC needs to be prepared by the user. The following shows each cable connection diagram and relevant connectors. Connection diagram GOT side SIEMENS product side Cable connection and signal direction Signal name Pin No.
  • Page 670 Connector specifications (1) GOT side connector Use the following as the RS-232 interface and RS-232 communication unit connector on the GOT. For the GOT side of the RS-232 cable, use a connector or connector cover applicable to the GOT connector. (a) Connector type 9-pin D-sub (male) inch screw fixed type (b) Connector model...

  • Page 671: Preparatory Procedures For Monitoring

    18.3 Preparatory Procedures for Monitoring The following shows the procedures to be taken before monitoring and corresponding reference sections. Section 18.3.1 Install the OS onto the GOT. Installing OS onto GOT Section 18.3.2 Make sure that the OS is installed on the GOT. Checking OS installation on GOT Section 18.3.3 Set the communication interface.
  • Page 672 18.3.1 Installing OS onto GOT Install the standard monitor OS, communication driver and option OS onto the GOT. For the OS installation methods, refer to the following manual. GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual Check the following on the communication driver. ·...

  • Page 673: Checking Os Installation On Got

    18.3.2 Checking OS installation on GOT Check if the OS is properly installed or not on the Drive information tab of GT Designer2. For the operation on the Drive information tab, refer to the following manual. GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual The OS has been installed successfully on the GOT if the following can be confirmed: 1) Standard monitor OS...

  • Page 674: Setting Communication Interface (Communication Settings)

    18.3.3 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) Make the GOT communication interface settings on [Communication setting] of GT Designer2. Select the same communication driver as the one installed on the GOT for each communication interface. For details on [Communication setting] of GT Designer2, refer to the following manual. GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual Communication settings...
  • Page 675 Communication detail settings (1) SIEMENS S7-300/400. Item Description Range Set this item when change the transmission speed used for com- 9600bps, 19200bps, Transmission Speed munication with the connected equipment. 38400bps <Default: 38400bps> Specify the adapter address (station No. of the PLC that the GOT Adapter Address will monitor) in the connected network.
  • Page 676 (2) SIEMENS S7-200 Item Description Range Set this item when change the transmission speed used for 9600bps,19200bps,38400bps, Transmission Speed communication with the connected equipment. 57600bps,115200bps <Default: 19200bps> Set this item when change the data length used for communication Data Bit with the connected equipment.

  • Page 677: Downloading Project Data

    18.3.4 Downloading project data Download project data to the GOT. For how to download project data, refer to the following manual. GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual Check the necessary items and click the button. Download Download 18 - 13 18.3 Preparatory Procedures for Monitoring 18.3.4 Downloading project data...

  • Page 678: Attaching Communication Unit And Connecting Cable

    18.3.5 Attaching communication unit and connecting cable Cautions when attaching the communication unit and connecting the cable Shut off all phases of the GOT power supply before attaching the communication unit and connecting the cable. Attaching the communication unit Attach the serial communication unit to the extension unit connector on the GOT.
  • Page 679 How to connect the cable (1) How to connect the RS-232 cable (a) For the GT15 • connection to the RS-232 interface Connect the RS-232 cable to the RS-232 interface on the GOT. •connection to the RS-232 communication unit Connect the RS-232 cable to the RS-232 communication unit on the GOT.

  • Page 680: Verifying Got Recognizes Connected Equipment

    18.3.6 Verifying GOT recognizes connected equipment Verify the GOT recognizes connected equipments on [Communication setting] of the Utility. • Channel number of communication interface, communication drivers allocation status • Communication unit installation status Remark How to display Utility(at default), utility call key 1-point press on GOT screen upper-left corner When using GT1595-X Utility display...
  • Page 681 After powering up the GOT, touch [Main Menu] [Communication setting] from the Utility. The [Communication setting] appears. Verify that the following communication driver name is displayed in the box for the communication interface to be used. • Communication driver (any of the following) •...

  • Page 682: Checking For Normal Monitoring

    18.3.7 Checking for normal monitoring Check for errors occurring on the GOT. Presetting the system alarm to project data allows you to identify errors occurred on the GOT, PLC CPU, servo amplifier and communications. For details on the system alarm, refer to the following manual. User’s Manual (When using GT15) Communication...
  • Page 683 Perform an I/O check. Whether the PLC can communicate with the GOT or not can be checked by the I/O check function. If this check ends successfully, it means correct communication interface settings and proper cable connection. Display the I/O check screen by [Main Menu] [Debug &...
  • Page 684 18.4 PLC Side Setting SIEMENS PLC For details of SIEMENS PLCs, refer to the following manuals. USER’s Manual for the SIEMENS PLC Model name Reference PLC CPU S7-200 Section 18.4.2 HMI Adapter 6ES7 972-0CA11-0XA0 Section 18.4.1 PC/PPI cable 6ES7 901-3BF20-0XA0 Section 18.4.2 18.4.1 Connecting to HMI Adapter Communication settings...

  • Page 685: Plc Side Setting

    18.4.2 Connecting to SIMATIC S7-200 Communication settings Set the communication settings of PLC and PC/PPI cable. (1) PLC settings Set the communication settings of PLC by operating the SIEMENS programing tool(STEP7- WIN32). Setting item PLC settings Transmission speed*1 9600bps,19200bps Data bit 8-bit(fixed) Parity bit Even(fixed)
  • Page 686 18.5 Precautions GOT alarm list (system alarm) function Error information cannot be monitored when the GOT is connected to a SIEMENS PLC. (The error information on the PLC CPU side can be monitored.) For details on the alarm list (system alarm), refer to the following manual: GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual At system startup...
  • Page 687 18.6 List of Functions Added by Version Upgrade The following describes the function added by version upgrade of GT Designer2 or OS. For using the function below, use the GT Designer2 or OS of the stated version or later. Version of GT Item Description Version of OS...
  • Page 688 MEMO 18 - 24...
  • Page 689 MEMO...
  • Page 690 INDEX Accessing the inverter by the FR Configurator .. 29-18 Direct connection to a CPU ........3-1 Accessing the PLC by the GX Developer ..29-15 Allen-Bradley PLC MicroLogix1000/1200/1500 Series....17-5 Ethernet connection ..........8-1 SLC500 Series ..........17-3 AnCPU type Bus connection...........
  • Page 691 Motion controller CPU (Q Series) Preparatory procedures for accessing Bus connection ..........2-15 FA transparent function........29-9 CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) .. 6-2 Preparatory procedures for monitoring CC-Link connection (via G4)......7-2 Bar code reader connection ..... 25-4,26-4 Computer link connection ........ 4-16 Bus connection..........

  • Page 692: Setting On Servo Amplifier Side

    Computer link connection........4-6 Direct connection to a CPU........ 3-5 YAMATAKE TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER Ethernet connection ......... 8-2,27-62 DMC10 ............. 21-2 MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network) SDC15, SDC25/26, SDC35/36 ......21-4 ..............5-3,5-5 SDC20/21............21-6 QnASCPU type SDC30/31............21-9 Bus connection........... 2-8 SDC40A/40B/40G ..........
  • Page 693 1. Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range If any faults or defects (hereinafter "Failure") found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the gratis warranty term, the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service Company.
  • Page 694 Microsoft Windows, Microsoft Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries. Other company and product names herein are either trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.
  • Page 696 GOT1000 Series Connection Manual GT1000-U(CON)-E MODEL MODEL 1D7M26 CODE SH(NA)-080532ENG-D 1/2(0601)MEE HEAD OFFICE : TOKYO BUILDING, 2-7-3 MARUNOUCHI, CHIYODA-KU, TOKYO 100-8310, JAPAN NAGOYA WORKS : 1-14 , YADA-MINAMI 5-CHOME , HIGASHI-KU, NAGOYA , JAPAN When exported from Japan, this manual does not require application to the Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry for service transaction permission.
  • Page 697 GOT1000 Series Connection Manual...
  • Page 699 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (Always read these precautions before using this equipment.) Before using this product, please read this manual and the relevant manuals introduced in this manual carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly. The precautions given in this manual are concerned with this product. In this manual, the safety precautions are ranked as "DANGER"...
  • Page 700 [DESIGN PRECAUTIONS] DANGER Incorrect operation of the touch switch(s) may lead to a serious accident if the GOT backlight is gone out. When the GOT backlight goes out, the POWER LED flickers (green/orange) and the display section turns black and causes the monitor screen to appear blank, while the input of the touch switch(s) remains active.
  • Page 701 [MOUNTING PRECAUTIONS] CAUTION When loading the communication unit to the GOT, fit it to the connection interface of the GOT and tighten the mounting screws in the specified torque range. Overtightening can cause a drop, failure or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit. When mounting the multi-color display board onto the GOT, tighten the mounting screws within the specified torque range.
  • Page 702 [WIRING PRECAUTIONS] CAUTION Please make sure to ground FG terminal and LG terminal of the GOT power supply section by applying Class D Grounding (Class 3 Grounding Method) or higher which is used exclusively for the GOT. Not doing so may cause an electric shock or malfunction. Be sure to tighten any unused terminal screws with a torque of 0.5 to 0.8N•m.
  • Page 703 [TEST OPERATION PRECAUTIONS] DANGER Before performing the test operations of the user creation monitor screen (such as turning ON or OFF bit device, changing the word device current value, changing the settings or current values of the timer or counter, and changing the buffer memory current value), read through the manual carefully and make yourself familiar with the operation method.
  • Page 704 [STARTUP/MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS] CAUTION Do not disassemble or modify the unit. Doing so can cause a failure, malfunction, injury or fire. Do not touch the conductive and electronic parts of the unit directly. Doing so can cause a unit malfunction or failure. The cables connected to the unit must be run in ducts or clamped.
  • Page 705 [DISPOSAL PRECAUTIONS] CAUTION When disposing of the product, handle it as industrial waste. [TRANSPORTATION PRECAUTIONS] CAUTION When transporting lithium batteries, make sure to treat them based on the transport regulations. (For details on models subject to restrictions, refer to the User's Manual for the GOT you are using.) Make sure to transport the GOT main unit and/or relevant unit(s) in the manner they will not be exposed to the impact exceeding the impact resistance described in the general specifications of the User's Manual, as they are precision devices.
  • Page 706 REVISIONS * The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover. This volume is SH(NA)-080532ENG-D 2/2. Print Date * Manual Number Revision Oct., 2004 SH(NA)-080532ENG-A First edition Mar., 2005 SH(NA)-080532ENG-B Compatible with GT Designer2 Version2.09K Addition Chapter 5, Chapter 6, Chapter 7, Chapter 8, Chapter 10, Chapter 11, Chapter 12, Chapter 13, Chapter 19, Chapter 20, Chapter 21, Chapter 22, Chapter 23,Section 3.1.8, Section 3.1.9...
  • Page 707 This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind, nor does it confer any patent licenses. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual.
  • Page 708 INTRODUCTION Thank you for choosing Mitsubishi Graphic Operation Terminal (Mitsubishi GOT). Read this manual and make sure you understand the functions and performance of the GOT thoroughly in advance to ensure correct use. CONTENTS SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ..........................A - 1 REVISIONS...............................A - 8 INTRODUCTION.............................A - 10...

  • Page 709: List Of Functions Added By Version Upgrade

    3. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 3 - 1 to 3 - 36 System Configuration 3 - 2 3.1.1 Connecting to QCPU ......................3 - 3 3.1.2 Connecting to QnACPU or ACPU ..................3 - 5 3.1.3 Connecting to FXCPU (FX , FX , FX , FX...

  • Page 710: Preparatory Procedures For Monitoring

    4.4.1 Connecting serial communication module (Q Series)............4 - 40 4.4.2 Connecting serial communication module (QnA Series) ............ 4 - 43 4.4.3 Connecting computer link module ..................4 - 46 5. MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 5 - 1 to 5 - 44 System Configuration 5 - 2 5.1.1...

  • Page 711: Installing Os Onto Got

    7.2.1 Installing OS onto GOT ......................7 - 6 7.2.2 Checking OS installation on GOT..................7 - 7 7.2.3 Setting communication interface (Communication settings)..........7 - 8 7.2.4 Downloading project data ....................7 - 10 7.2.5 Attaching communication unit and connecting cable............7 - 11 7.2.6 Verifying GOT recognizes connected equipment ...............

  • Page 712: Checking Os Installation On Got

    PLC Side Setting 9 - 37 9.4.1 Connecting CPM2A, CQM1, CQM1H, C200H or RS-232C adapter ........9 - 38 9.4.2 Connecting CJ1 or CS1 ...................... 9 - 39 9.4.3 Connecting CV500/CV1000/CV2000 or CVM1 ..............9 - 42 9.4.4 Connecting connection cable....................9 - 44 9.4.5 Connecting rack type host link unit ..................

  • Page 713: Setting Communication Interface (Communication Settings)

    11.3.3 Setting communication interface (Communication settings)..........11 - 24 11.3.4 Downloading project data ....................11 - 26 11.3.5 Attaching communication unit and connecting cable............11 - 27 11.3.6 Verifying GOT recognizes connected equipment ............. 11 - 31 11.3.7 Checking for normal monitoring..................11 - 33 11.4 PLC Side Setting 11 - 35...

  • Page 714: Downloading Project Data

    13.3.6 Verifying GOT recognizes connected equipment ............. 13 - 22 13.3.7 Checking for normal monitoring..................13 - 24 13.4 PLC Side Setting 13 - 26 13.5 List of Functions Added by Version Upgrade 13 - 28 14. CONNECTION TO MATSUSHITA PLC 14 - 1 to 14 - 38 14.1 System Configuration...

  • Page 715: Attaching Communication Unit And Connecting Cable

    15.4 PLC Side Setting 15 - 33 16. CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC 16 - 1 to 16 - 36 16.1 System Configuration 16 - 2 16.1.1 Connecting to FA-M3......................16 - 2 16.1.2 Connecting to FA500 ......................16 - 5 16.2 Connection Cable 16 - 7...

  • Page 716: Verifying Got Recognizes Connected Equipment

    18.3.1 Installing OS onto GOT....................... 18 - 8 18.3.2 Checking OS installation on GOT..................18 - 9 18.3.3 Setting communication interface (Communication settings)..........18 - 10 18.3.4 Downloading project data ....................18 - 13 18.3.5 Attaching communication unit and connecting cable............18 - 14 18.3.6 Verifying GOT recognizes connected equipment .............

  • Page 717: Connection To Omron Temperature Controller 20 - 1 To

    TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER CONNECTIONS 20. CONNECTION TO OMRON TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 20 - 1 to 20 - 34 20.1 System configuration 20 - 2 20.1.1 Connecting E5AN, E5EN....................20 - 2 20.1.2 Connecting to E5CN, E5GN ....................20 - 4 20.1.3 Connecting to E5ZN ......................20 - 6 20.2 Connection Cable 20 - 8...

  • Page 718: Connection To Rkc Temperature Controller 22 - 1 To

    21.4.1 Connecting to DMC10 ...................... 21 - 38 21.4.2 Connecting SDC40A/40B/40G ..................21 - 39 21.4.3 Connecting SDC15, SDC25/26, SDC35/36..............21 - 39 21.4.4 Connecting SDC20/21, SDC30/31 .................. 21 - 40 21.4.5 Connecting CMC10L ......................21 - 40 21.4.6 Station NO. settings......................21 - 42 21.5 Precautions 21 - 43...

  • Page 719: Station No. Settings

    23.3.5 Attaching communication unit and connecting cable............23 - 22 23.3.6 Verifying GOT recognizes connected equipment ............. 23 - 25 23.3.7 Checking for normal monitoring..................23 - 27 23.4 FREQROL Series Inverter Side Settings 23 - 29 23.5 Precautions 23 - 31 23.6 List of Functions Added by Version Upgrade 23 - 32...

  • Page 720: Precautions

    26. PRINTER CONNECTION 26 - 1 to 26 - 14 26.1 System Configuration 26 - 2 26.2 Preparatory Procedures for Monitoring 26 - 4 26.2.1 Installing OS onto GOT....................... 26 - 5 26.2.2 Checking OS installation on GOT..................26 - 6 26.2.3 Setting communication interface (Communication settings)..........

  • Page 721: List Of Functions Added By Version Upgrade

    27.3.10 CNC Side Settings......................27 - 58 27.3.11 Precautions........................27 - 61 27.4 Ethernet Connection 27 - 62 27.4.1 System Configuration ....................... 27 - 62 27.4.2 Preparatory Procedures for Monitoring ................27 - 64 27.4.3 Installing OS onto GOT ....................27 - 65 27.4.4 Checking OS installation on GOT..................

  • Page 722: Attacing Communication Unit And Connecting Cable

    29.5.1 Precautions common to each software................29 - 20 29.5.2 When using GX Developer ....................29 - 23 29.5.3 When using FR Configurator .................... 29 - 25 29.6 List of Functions Added by Version Upgrade 29 - 26 30. MULTIPLE-GT11 CONNECTION FUNCTION 30 - 1 to 30 - 20 30.1 System Configuration...

  • Page 723: About Manuals

    Describes specifications and settings of each object function applicable to GOT1000 series. (Sold separately)* GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (1/2, 2/2) SH-080532ENG Describes system configurations of the connection method applicable to GOT1000 series and cable creation (1D7M26) (Sold separately) GOT1000 Series Gateway Functions Manual SH-080545ENG Describes specifications, system comfigurations and setting method of the gateway function.

  • Page 724: Abbreviations And Generic Terms In This Manual

    Abbreviation of GT1575-VTBA, GT1575-VTBD GT157 GT1575-VN Abbreviation of GT1575-VNBA, GT1575-VNBD GT1572-VN Abbreviation of GT1572-VNBA, GT1572-VNBD GT1565-V Abbreviation of GT1565-VTBA, GT1565-VTBD GOT1000 Series GT156 GT1562-VN Abbreviation of GT1562-VNBA, GT1562-VNBD GT15 , GT15 Abbreviation of GT1595, GT1585, GT157 , GT156 GT1155-Q Abbreviation of GT1155-QSBD...
  • Page 725 Option Abbreviations and generic terms Description GT15-90XLTT, GT15-80SLTT, GT15-70SLTT, GT15-70VLTT, Backlight GT15-70VLTN, GT15-60VLTT, GT15-60VLTN GT15-FNB, GT15-QFNB, GT15-QFNB16M, GT15-QFNB32M, Option function board GT15-QFNB48M, GT11-50FNB Multi-color display board GT15-XHNB, GT15-VHNB Printer unit GT15-PRN GT15-90PSCB, GT15-90PSGB, GT15-90PSCW, GT15-90PSGW, GT15-80PSCB, GT15-80PSGB, GT15-80PSCW, GT15-80PSGW, GT15-70PSCB, GT15-70PSGB, GT15-70PSCW, GT15-70PSGW,...
  • Page 726 Others Abbreviations and generic terms Description Omron PLC Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by OMRON Corporation KEYENCE PLC Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by KEYENCE Sharp PLC Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by SHARP Corporation Toshiba PLC Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by TOSHIBA CORPORATION HITACHI PLC Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems Co., Ltd.

  • Page 727: How To Read This Manual

    HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL About each of functions This manual includes information of GT Designer2 Version2.27D. For additional functions of upgraded version, refer to the List of functions added by version upgrade. Symbols Following symbols are used in this manual. Refers to the information required.
  • Page 728 MEMO A - 30...
  • Page 729 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION Chapter 19 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION...
  • Page 730 MEMO...
  • Page 731 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION 19.1 Microcomputer Connection ..page 19-2 This section describes the microcomputer connection of the GOT. 19.2 System Configuration ..page 19-4 This section describes the equipment and cables needed for establishing a microcomputer connection.

  • Page 732: Microcomputer Connection

    19.1 Microcomputer Connection The "microcomputer connection" is a function by which data can be written or read from a PC, microcomputer board, PLC, etc. (hereinafter referred to as "host") to virtual devices of the GOT. Interrupt output is also available from the GOT to the host. Write , Read Command Virtual devices inside GOT RW 0100 000A 0163 0362...
  • Page 733 Flow of data processing (1) When reading or writing data Host Screen data Request message Screen display Device data area Display (D4 to 9) (virtual devices) 04/06/01 18:46:49 Response message Input (D20) 1254 The host sends a request message (the read/write command) to the GOT. The GOT performs a read/write processing to its virtual devices according to the request from the host.

  • Page 734: System Configuration

    19.2 System Configuration Select a system configuration suitable for your application. Conventions used in this section Numbers (e.g. ) of System configuration and connection conditions correspond to the numbers (e.g. ) of System equipment. Use these numbers as references when confirming models and applications. 19 - 4 19.2 System Configuration...
  • Page 735 Communication driver Computer System configuration and connection conditions Connection conditions System configuration No. of GOTs Distance RS-232 cable Differs according to host side specifications. RS-422 cable System equipment (1) GOT Image Name Model name RS-232 RS-232 interface (Built into GOT) •...
  • Page 736 Image Name Model name RS-232 cable • Between host and GOT (To be prepared by the user. Section 19.3 Connection Cable) RS-422 cable • Between host and GOT 19 - 6 19.2 System Configuration...

  • Page 737: Connection Cable

    19.3 Connection Cable The RS-232 or RS-422 cable used for connecting the GOT to the microcomputer should be prepared by the user. The following provides connection diagrams for each cable, connector specifications and other information. 19.3.1 RS-232 cable The following shows the connection diagrams and connector specifications of the RS-232 cable used for connecting the GOT to a microcomputer.
  • Page 738 Connector specifications (1) GOT side connector Use the following as the RS-232 interface and RS-232 communication unit connector on the GOT. For the GOT side of the RS-232 cable, use a connector or connector cover applicable to the GOT connector. (a) Connector type 9-pin D-sub (male) inch screw fixed type (b) Connector model...

  • Page 739: Rs-422 Cable

    19.3.2 RS-422 cable The following shows the connection diagrams and connector specifications of the RS-422 cable used for connecting the GOT to a microcomputer. Connection diagram GOT side Host side Cable connection and signal direction Signal name Pin No. Signal name SHELL Connector specifications (1) GOT side connector...

  • Page 740: Device Data Area

    GT Designer2. Refer to the following manual for device batch edit of GT Designer2. GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual GOT1000 Series virtual devices GOT-F900 Series virtual devices D0 to 2047 D2048 to 4095 R0 to 4095...

  • Page 741: D Devices

    19.4.1 D devices The D devices are word devices into which GOT communication errors, clock data or other information are stored. The user can also store data using the user area. List of D devices The following lists the D devices (virtual devices inside the GOT). Address Description Set side...
  • Page 742 (from previous page) Address Description Set side Clock data (hour) – – Data of hours 00 to 23 stored as 2-digit BCD Unused Clock data (minute) – – Data of minutes 00 to 59 stored as 2-digit BCD Unused Clock data (second) System –...
  • Page 743 (from previous page) Address Description Set side Interrupt output When data are written to D13 and D14 from a GOT touch switch, for example, the data of D13 and *1 *2 D14 are transmitted (interrupt output) to the host side. The data amount (the number of bytes) to be interrupt-output is set at "Interrupt Data Byte"...
  • Page 744 Differences in address specifications by data format The address specification of devices varies depending on the data format. The following shows the address specification values of each data format. Address specification value Address Formats Formats Formats Formats 1, 2 Formats 14, 15 3 to 6 7 to 10 11 to 13...

  • Page 745: R Devices

    19.4.2 R devices The R devices are word devices into which user data are stored. All of these devices can be used as a user area. List of R devices and differences in address specification by data format The following shows the R devices (virtual devices inside the GOT). The address specification values different depending on the data format are also given below.

  • Page 746: L Devices

    19.4.3 L devices The L devices are bit devices into which user data are stored. All of these devices can be used as a user area. List of L devices and differences in address specification by data format The following shows the L devices (virtual devices inside the GOT). The address specification values different depending on the data format are also given below.

  • Page 747: M Devices

    19.4.4 M devices The M devices are bit devices into which user data are stored. All of these devices can be used as a user area. List of M devices and differences in address specification by data format The following shows the M devices (virtual devices inside the GOT). The address specification values different depending on the data format are also given below.

  • Page 748: Sd Devices

    19.4.5 SD devices The SD devices are word devices into which GOT communication errors (error codes), clock data and other information are stored. List of SD devices The following lists the SD devices (virtual devices inside the GOT). Address Description Set side 100ms counter (32 bits) The counter is incremented at 100ms intervals after GOT is turned ON.
  • Page 749 (From previous page) Address Description Set side Clock data (year) 4-digit year data is stored. Clock data (day of week) System Day-of-the-week data is stored. 0: Sunday 1: Monday 2: Tuesday 3: Wednesday 4: Thursday 5: Friday 6: Saturday SD10 to 15 Unused If a wrong day of the week is set by the clock data setting command, the clock data will differ from the time displayed on the utility.
  • Page 750 Differences in address specifications by data format The address specification of devices varies depending on the data format. The following shows the address specification values for each data format. Address specification value Address Formats Formats Formats Formats 1, 2 Formats 14, 15 3 to 6 7 to 10 11 to 13...

  • Page 751: Sm Devices

    19.4.6 SM devices The SM devices are bit devices into which interrupt outputs and clock data that turn ON/OFF at 1-second cycles. List of SM devices The following shows the SM devices (virtual devices inside the GOT). Address Description Set side Interrupt output When the ON/OFF state of SM0 to 49 is changed by a touch switch on the GOT, for example, the *1*2...
  • Page 752 (1) About the side where virtual devices are set System: Set on the system side. User: Set on the user side (by sending request messages from host or using the touch switches, etc. on the GOT). (2) About interrupt outputs (SM0 to 49) •...

  • Page 753: Message Formats

    19.5 Message Formats This section describes the format of messages that can be used in the microcomputer connection. 19.5.1 Data format type and application Data format type and application Communication is possible using any of the data formats shown below. (1) Formats 1, 2 (GOT-A900 series microcomputer connection) This is the same message format as when a microcomputer connection is established with the GOT-A900 series.
  • Page 754 (4) Formats 11 to 13 (Digital Electronics Corporation's memory link method) This is the same format as the protocol of the Digital Electronics Corporation's memory link method. Type Name Description Reference Digital Electronics Corporation's memory link This is the basic format of the Digital Electronics Corporation's Format 11 method (compatible mode) memory link method.

  • Page 755: List Of Commands

    19.5.2 List of commands The following shows the list of commands available in each data format. List of commands for formats 1, 2 (GOT-A900 series microcomputer connection) Command Max. number of points Command name Description ASCII processed Symbol code Reads bit devices in 16-point units. 64 words (1024 points) Batch read in word units...
  • Page 756 Command lists for formats 7 to 10 (QnA compatible 3C/4C frame) Sub- Max. number of points Command Command name Description command processed 0401 0001 Batch read in bit units Reads bit devices in 1-point units. 64 points 64 words (1024 points) Reads bit devices in 16-point units.
  • Page 757 List of commands for formats 14, 15 (GOT-F900 series microcomputer connection) Command Max. number of points Command name Description ASCII processed Symbol code Reads bit devices in byte units. 255bytes (2040 points) Batch read (w/out station No.) Reads word devices in byte units. 255bytes (127 points) Reads bit devices in byte units.

  • Page 758: (A171Shcpun, A172Shcpun, A173Uhcpu(-S1))

    19.5.3 Formats 1, 2 (GOT-A900 series microcomputer connection) Basic format of data communication Item Message format Command Data Check Request message (host GOT) Sum check is performed in this range. (1) During processing of read commands Data Check Response message during Sum check is performed in this range.
  • Page 759 Details of data items in message format Data code during communication Communication is performed in ASCII code. (excluding interrupt output) (1) Control codes Symbol ASCII code Description Start of Text (start marker of message frame) End of Text (end marker of message frame) End of Transmission Enquiry (start of enquiry) Negative ACK (error response)
  • Page 760 (6) Data Specifies data to read from/write to the specified device data. (word unit) Data notated in Hex is converted to a 4-digit ASCII code (Hex) and transmitted from the upper digit. (7) Error code This is the response message at faulty communication appended with error contents. Error code is transmitted in 1 byte.
  • Page 761 Message format (1) Batch read in word units (RD) command (a) When reading a word device The following shows an example of reading the two points of the virtual devices D100 and D101. (Assuming D100="0102 " and D101="0304 " are stored.) D100 0102 D101...
  • Page 762 (b) When reading a bit device The following shows an example of reading the two points of the virtual devices M0 to M31. (Assuming M0="1" and M31="1" are stored.) M15 to 0 0001 M31 to 16 8000 Item Message format Number of Command Address...
  • Page 763 (2) Batch write in word units (WD) command (a) When writing to a word device The following shows as example of writing "0064 " and "0065 " to virtual devices D100 and D101. D100 0000 D100 0064 D101 0000 D101 0065 Before execution After execution...
  • Page 764 (b) When writing to a bit device The following shows an example of writing "1"s to virtual devices M0 and M31. 0000 0001 M15 to 0 M15 to 0 M31 to 16 0000 M31 to 16 8000 Before execution After execution Item Message format Sum check is performed in this range.
  • Page 765 (3) Random read in word units (RR) command The following shows an example of reading the two points of the virtual devices D100 and M0 to M15. (Assuming D100="0064 " and M0="1" are stored.) D100 0064 M15 to 0 0001 Item Message format Command...
  • Page 766 (4) Random write in word units (RW) command The following shows an example of writing "0064 " and "1" to virtual devices D100 and M0, respectively. D100 0000 D100 0064 M15 to 0 0000 M15 to 0 0001 Before execution After execution Item Message format...
  • Page 767 (5) Read clock data (TR) command The following shows an example of reading the clock data of GOT. (Assuming that the clock data of GOT has been set to "2004, June 1, 18:46:49, Tuesday".) Time display 2004/06/01 18:46:49 Item Message format Command Check Request message...
  • Page 768 (6) Set clock data (TS) command The following shows an example of setting the clock data of GOT. (Assuming the clock data of GOT is to be set to "2004, June 1, 18:46:49 Tuesday".) Time display 2004/06/01 18:46:49 After execution Item Message format Second...
  • Page 769 (7) In the case of interrupt outputs The following shows an example of an interrupt output when data are written to the interrupt output devices (D13 and D14). (Assuming that "3139 " is written to D13 and "AA55 " to D14.) Example: When the number of interrupt data bytes is 2 3139 Interrupt...
  • Page 770 Interrupt output • To set so that interrupts are not issued, set SM52 (interrupt code output inhibit flag) ON. ( Section 19.4.6 SM devices) • To issue interrupts, set the data length to "8 bits" at "Communication Detail Settings". ( Section 19.6.3 Setting communication interface (Communication settings)) •...

  • Page 771: Formats 3 To 6 (A Compatible 1C Frame)

    19.5.4 Formats 3 to 6 (A compatible 1C frame) Basic format of data communication This is the same message format as when communication is performed using the dedicated protocol (A compatible 1C frame) of the A Series computer link module. For details of the basic format of data communication, refer to the following manual: Q Corresponding MELSEC Communication Protocol Reference Manual This section describes items whose settings differ from the dedicated protocol of the A Series computer...
  • Page 772 (4) Address Specifies the head No. of the device data to be read/written. The data annotated in decimal is converted to a 5- or 7-digit ASCII code (Hex) and transmitted from the upper digit. For details of the device range that can be accessed, refer to the following. Section 19.4 Device Data Area (5) Number of points Specifies the number of device data to be read/written.
  • Page 773 Message Format The following shows the message format of the dedicated commands for the GOT microcomputer connection. (1) Read clock data (TR) command The following shows an example of reading the clock data of GOT. (Assuming that the clock data of GOT has been set to "2004, June 1, 18:46:49, Tuesday".) Time display 2004/06/01 18:46:49 Item...
  • Page 774 (2) Set clock data (TS) command The following shows an example of setting the clock data of GOT. (Assuming that the clock data is to be set to "2004, June 1, 18:46:49 Tuesday".) Time display 2004/06/01 18:46:49 After execution Item Message format Example: Format 3 (A compatible 1C frame (format 1)) Character C section...
  • Page 775 Error code list The following shows error code, error contents, cause, and measures. Error code Description Measures • Check the communication cable and communication module Parity error attachment. The parity bit does not match. • Check the settings of "Communication Detail Settings". •...

  • Page 776: Formats 7 To 10 (Qna Compatible 3C/4C Frame)

    19.5.5 Formats 7 to 10 (QnA compatible 3C/4C frame) Basic format of data communication This is the same message format as when communication is performed using the MC protocol (QnA compatible 3C/4C frame) of the Q/QnA Series serial communication module. For details of the basic format of data communication, refer to the following manual: Q Corresponding MELSEC Communication Protocol Reference Manual This section describes items whose settings differ from the MC protocol of the Q/QnA Series serial...
  • Page 777 (3) Command, sub-command Specifies the contents to access from the host to GOT. The command and sub-command are converted to a 4-digit ASCII code (Hex) and transmitted from the upper digit. For details of the commands that can be used, refer to the following. Section 19.5.2 List of commands (4) Device code Specifies the code by which the device data to be read/written is recognized.
  • Page 778 used and the device ranges to match the GOT specifications. Message Format The following shows the message format of the dedicated commands for a microcomputer connection of GOT. (1) Read clock data (1901) command The following shows an example of reading the clock data of GOT. (Assuming that the clock data of GOT has been set to "2004, June 1, 18:46:49, Tuesday".) Time display 2004/06/01 18:46:49...
  • Page 779 (from previous page) Item Message format Example: Format 7 (QnA compatible 4C frame (format 1)) Host Frame ID Network Request destination Request destination Station No. PLC No. module station No. Address No. module I/O No. Following – – Response message during faulty communication (GOT...
  • Page 780 (2) Set clock data (0901) command The following shows an example of setting the clock data of GOT. (Assuming that the clock data is to be set to "2004, June 1, 18:46:49 Tuesday".) Time display 2004/06/01 18:46:49 After execution Item Message format Example: Format 7 (QnA compatible 4C frame (format 1)) Request...
  • Page 781 (from previous page) Item Message format Example: Format 7 (QnA compatible 4C frame (format 1)) Host Frame ID Network Request destination Request destination Station No. PLC No. Address No. module I/O No. module station No. Following – – Response message during faulty communication (GOT...
  • Page 782 Error code list The following shows error code, error contents, cause, and measures. Error code Description Measures • Review the contents of the message to transmit. Command error • Check the commands in the message. 7E40 An unsupported command or sub-command was used. Section 19.5.2 List of commands) Data length error 7E41...

  • Page 783: Formats 11 To 13 (Digital Electronics Corporation's Memory Link Method)

    19.5.6 Formats 11 to 13 (Digital Electronics Corporation's memory link method) Basic format of data communication This is the same format as the protocol of the Digital Electronics Corporation's memory link method. For details of the basic format of data communication, refer to the following manual: The connection manual of the device manufactured by Digital Electronics Corporation This section describes items whose settings differ from the protocols of the Digital Electronics Corporation's memory link method and dedicated commands for a microcomputer connection of GOT.
  • Page 784 (4) Number of points Specifies the number of device data to be read/written. (Setting range: 1 to 40 Data notated in Hex is converted to a 4-digit ASCII code (Hex) and transmitted from the upper digit. (5) Year, month, day, hour, minute, second and day of the week data Specifies year, month, day, hour, minute, second, and day of the week to be read/set to the GOT clock data.
  • Page 785 Message Format The following shows the message format of the dedicated command of the GOT for a microcomputer connection. (1) Read clock data (N) command The following shows an example of reading the clock data of GOT. (Assuming that the clock data of GOT has been set to "2004, June 1, 18:46:49, Tuesday".) Time display 2004/06/01 18:46:49 Item...
  • Page 786 (2) Set clock data (M) command The following shows an example of setting the clock data of GOT. (Assuming that the clock data is to be set to "2004, June 1, 18:46:49 Tuesday".) Time display 2004/06/01 18:46:49 After execution Item Message format Example: Format 13 (Digital Electronics Corporation's memory link method (extended mode, ASCII code 1:n)) Com-...
  • Page 787 (3) In the case of interrupt outputs The following shows an example of an interrupt output when data are written to the interrupt output devices (D13 and D14). (Assuming that "3139 " is written to D13 and "AA55 " to D14.) Example: When the number of interrupt data bytes is 2 in format 11 3139 Interrupt...
  • Page 788 Interrupt output • To set so that interrupts are not issued, set SM52 (interrupt code output inhibit flag) ON. ( Section 19.4.6 SM devices) • To issue interrupts in format 11, set the data length to "8 bits" at "Communication Detail Settings".

  • Page 789: Formats 14, 15 (Got-F900 Series Microcomputer Connection)

    19.5.7 Formats 14, 15 (GOT-F900 series microcomputer connection) Basic format of data communication Item Message format (format 14: GOT-F900 series microcomputer connection (format 15: GOT-F900 series microcomputer connection (format 1)) (format 2)) (1) w/out station No. (1) w/out station No. Com- Com- Data...
  • Page 790 Section 19.6.3 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) Details of data items in message format Data code during communication Communication is performed in ASCII code. (excluding interrupt output) Control codes Symbol ASCII code Description Start of Text (start marker of message frame) End of Text (end marker of message frame) End of Transmission Enquiry (start of enquiry)
  • Page 791 (6) Write specification Specifies how to change the data of the specified address by bit pattern. (Setting range: 0 to 3) Data notated in decimal is converted to a 1-digit ASCII code (Hex) and transmitted. (3) Multi-point write in bit units (3) command (w/out station No.), multi-point write in bit units (D) command (w/ station No.) (7) Number of bytes Specifies the number of bytes of the device data to be batch read/written.
  • Page 792 Message format (1) Batch read (0) command (w/out station No.), batch read (A) command (w/station No.) (a) When reading word device The following shows an example of reading four bytes of virtual devices R100 to R101 from the GOT at station No.15. (Assuming that R100="3D21 "...
  • Page 793 (b) When reading bit device The following shows an example of reading four bytes of the virtual devices M0 to M31. (Assuming that M0="1" and M31="1" are stored.) M15 to 0 0001 M31 to 16 8000 Item Message format (format 14: GOT-F900 series microcomputer connection (format 1)) Com- Number of Station No.
  • Page 794 (2) Batch write (1) command (w/out station No.), batch write (B) command (w/station No.) (a) When writing to word device The following shows an example of writing "3D21 " and "3604 " to virtual devices R100 and R101 on the GOT at station No.15. R100 0000 R100...
  • Page 795 (b) When writing to bit device The following shows an example of writing "1"s to virtual devices M0 and M31 on the GOT at station No.15. 0000 0001 M15 to 0 M15 to 0 0000 8000 M31 to 16 M31 to 16 Before execution After execution Item...
  • Page 796 (3) Multi-point write in bit units (3) command (w/out station No.), multi-point write in bit units (D) command (w/ station No.) The following shows an example of turning OFF the virtual device M31 and turning ON the virtual device M2038 on the GOT at station No.31. Item Message format (format 14: GOT-F900 series microcomputer connection (format 1))
  • Page 797 The write specification specifies how the data of the specified address is changed in the bit pattern. Write Function Description Action example specification Original data 1010 Bit pattern 1100 Bits set to "1" by the bit pattern are turned ON. specification Result 1110...
  • Page 798 (4) Fill command (4) (w/out station No.), fill command (E) (w/station No.) The following shows an example of writing "16"s to virtual devices R50 to R100 on the GOT at station No.27. 0000 1616 0000 1616 R100 0000 R100 1616 Before execution After execution Item...
  • Page 799 (5) Read clock data (6) command (w/out station No.), read clock data (G) command (w/station No.) The following shows an example of reading the clock data of GOT at station No.27. (Assuming that the clock data of GOT has been set to "2004, June 1, 18:46:49, Tuesday".) Time display 2004/06/01 18:46:49 Item...
  • Page 800 (6) Set clock data (5) command (w/out station No.), set clock data (F) command (w/station No.) The following shows an example of setting clock data of GOT at station No.27. (Assuming that the clock data is to be set to "2004, June 1, 18:46:49 Tuesday".) Time display 2004/06/01 18:46:49 After execution...
  • Page 801 (7) In the case of interrupt outputs The following shows an example of an interrupt output when data has been written to interrupt output devices D13 and D14. (Assuming that "3139 " is written to D13 and "AA55 " to D14.) Example: When the number of interrupt data bytes is 2 3139 Interrupt...
  • Page 802 Error code list When faulty, the error code is stored in SD2. For details of error code stored in SD2, the error contents, cause and measures, refer to the following: Section 19.4.5 Details and actions for errors (error codes) stored into SD2 When an error other than those to be stored in SD2 occurs, at faulty, only the NAK response is executed.

  • Page 803: Preparatory Procedures For Monitoring

    19.6 Preparatory Procedures for Monitoring The following shows the procedures to be taken before monitoring and corresponding reference sections. Section 19.6.1 Install the OS onto the GOT. Installing OS onto GOT Section 19.6.2 Make sure that the OS is installed on the GOT. Checking OS installation on GOT Section 19.6.3 Set the communication interface.

  • Page 804: Installing Os Onto Got

    19.6.1 Installing OS onto GOT Install the standard monitor OS, communication driver and option OS onto the GOT. For the OS installation methods, refer to the following manual. GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual Check the following under the Communication driver. •...

  • Page 805: Checking Os Installation On Got

    19.6.2 Checking OS installation on GOT Check if the OS is properly installed or not on the Drive information tab of GT Designer2. For the operation on the Drive information tab, refer to the following manual. GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual The OS has been installed successfully on the GOT if the following can be confirmed: 1) Standard monitor OS...

  • Page 806: Setting Communication Interface (Communication Settings)

    19.6.3 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) Make the GOT communication interface settings on [Communication setting] of GT Designer2. Select the same communication driver as the one installed on the GOT for each communication interface. For details on [Communication setting] of GT Designer2, refer to the following manual. GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual Communication settings...
  • Page 807 Communication detail settings Item Description Range Set this item when change the transmission speed used for 4800bps, 9600bps, Transmission Speed communication with the connected equipment. 19200bps, 38400bps, <Default: 19200bps> 57600bps, 115200bps Set this item when change the data length used for communication Data Bit with the connected equipment.

  • Page 808: Downloading Project Data

    19.6.4 Downloading project data Download project data to the GOT. For how to download project data, refer to the following manual. GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual Check the necessary items and click the button. Download Download 19 - 78 19.6 Preparatory Procedures for Monitoring 19.6.4 Downloading project data...

  • Page 809: Attaching Communication Unit And Connecting Cable

    19.6.5 Attaching communication unit and connecting cable Cautions when attaching the communication unit and connecting the cable Shut off all phases of the GOT power supply before attaching the communication unit and connecting the cable. Attaching the communication unit Attach the serial communication unit to the extension unit connector on the GOT.
  • Page 810 How to connect the cable (1) How to connect the RS-232 cable (a) For the GT15 • connection to the RS-232 interface Connect the RS-232 cable to the RS-232 interface on the GOT. • connection to the RS-232 communication unit Connect the RS-232 cable to the RS-232 communication unit on the GOT.
  • Page 811 (2) How to connect the RS-422 cable (a) For the GT15 • connection to the RS-232 interface Connect the RS-422 conversion unit to the RS- 232 interface on the GOT. Connect the RS-422 cable to the RS-422 conversion unit. • connection to the RS-422/485 communication unit Connect the RS-232 cable to the RS-232 communication unit on the GOT.
  • Page 812 When using the RS-422 conversion unit On "Communication settings" on the utility, make setting so that 5V DC power is supplied to the RS-422 conversion unit from the RS-232 interface on the GOT. For details on the utility, refer to the following manual: User's Manual Touch [5V supply].

  • Page 813: Verifying Got Recognizes Connected Equipment

    19.6.6 Verifying GOT recognizes connected equipment Verify the GOT recognizes connected equipments on [Communication setting] of the Utility. • Channel number of communication interface, communication drivers allocation status • Communication unit installation status Remark How to display Utility(at default), utility call key 1-point press on GOT screen upper-left corner When using GT1595-X Utility display...
  • Page 814 After powering up the GOT, touch [Main Menu] [Communication setting] from the Utility. The [Communication setting] appears. Verify that the following communication driver name is displayed in the box for the communication interface to be used. • Communication driver: Computer When the communication driver name is not displayed normally, carry out the following procedure again.

  • Page 815: Checking For Normal Monitoring

    19.6.7 Checking for normal monitoring Write data to virtual devices inside GOT. Send a message from the host to the GOT, and confirm that the values are stored in the virtual devices inside the GOT. Section 19.7 System Configuration Examples) Write command 0100 000A...
  • Page 816 Perform an I/O check. Whether the PLC can communicate with the GOT or not can be checked by the I/O check function. If this check ends successfully, it means correct communication interface settings and proper cable connection. Display the I/O check screen by [Main Menu] [Debug &...

  • Page 817: System Configuration Examples

    19.7 System Configuration Examples The following shows a system configuration example in the case of the microcomputer connection. System Configuration The system configuration example illustrated below is explained in this section. IBM-PC/AT-compatible PC ® ® (Microsoft Visual C++ Ver.6.0) Communication settings on GOT side and monitor screen settings (1) Transmission settings Set the transmission settings of the GOT.
  • Page 818 (b) Monitor screen image Create the following screens by GT Designer2. Base screen 1 Numerical value display function Sample Screen 1 By setting this with the numerical value display function, the device value of D21 can be monitored. The device value is incremented only while "Sample Screen 1"...
  • Page 819 Host side sample program The sample program (written in C) on the host side is included in GT Designer2 and installed when GT Designer2 is installed. Outline of system operation The following describes the processing on the host side, display/processing on the GOT side, and data transfer packets.
  • Page 820 *1 Displays the send packet structure of the screen 1 batch switching write packet. Number of Command Address Data 1 (D20) points Check – – – – Sum check is performed in this range. *2 Displays the send packet structure of the numerical value display batch write packet. Number of Sum check Command...

  • Page 821: Temperature Controller

    TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER CONNECTIONS Chapter 20 CONNECTION TO OMRON TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER Chapter 21 CONNECTION TO YAMATAKE TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER Chapter 22 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER...
  • Page 822 MEMO...

  • Page 823: List Of Functions Added By Version Upgrade

    CONNECTION TO OMRON TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 20.1 System configuration ... page 20-2 This section describes the equipment and cables needed when connecting a GOT to a OMRON temperature controller. Select a system suitable for your application. 20.2 Connection Cable.

  • Page 824: System Configuration

    20.1 System configuration Select a system configuration suitable for your application. Conventions used in this section Numbers (e.g. ) of System configuration and connection conditions correspond to the numbers (e.g. ) of System equipment. Use these numbers as references when confirming models and applications. 20.1.1 Connecting E5AN, E5EN Communication driver OMRON...
  • Page 825 System equipment (1) GOT Image Name Model name RS-232 RS-232 interface (Built into GOT) • For RS-232 communication RS-232 RS-232 RS-232 Communication Unit GT15-RS2-9P • For RS-232 communication RS-422/485 RS-422/485 RS-422/485 Communication Unit GT15-RS4-TE • For RS-485 communication (2) Temperature controller Image Name Model name...

  • Page 826: Connecting To E5Cn, E5Gn

    20.1.2 Connecting to E5CN, E5GN Communication driver OMRON THERMAC/INPANEL NEO System configuration and connection conditions Connection conditions Number of Number of Communi System configuration temperature Distance GOTs -cation controllers Interface converter 32 (max.) RS-232 15m or less RS-232 cable 2) RS-485 cable 1) 32 (max.) RS-485...
  • Page 827 System equipment (1) GOT Image Name Model name RS-232 RS-232 interface (Built into GOT) • For RS-232 communication RS-232 RS-232 RS-232 Communication Unit GT15-RS2-9P • For RS-232 communication RS-422/485 RS-422/485 RS-422/485 Communication Unit GT15-RS4-TE • For RS-485 communication (2) Temperature controller Image Name Model name...

  • Page 828: Connecting To E5Zn

    20.1.3 Connecting to E5ZN Communication driver OMRON THERMAC/INPANEL NEO System configuration and connection conditions Connection conditions Number of Number of Temperature Communi System configuration Distance GOTs controller -cation connection Interface converter 16 (max.) RS-232 15m or less RS-232 cable 2) RS-485 cable 1) 16 (max.) RS-485...
  • Page 829 System equipment (1) GOT Image Name Model name RS-232 RS-232 interface (Built into GOT) • For RS-232 communication RS-232 RS-232 RS-232 Communication Unit GT15-RS2-9P • For RS-232 communication RS-422/485 RS-422/485 RS-422/485 Communication Unit GT15-RS4-TE • For RS-485 communication (2) Temperature controller Image Name Model name...

  • Page 830: Connection Cable

    20.2 Connection Cable The RS-232 cable or RS-422 cable used for connecting the GOT to the PLC should be prepared by the user. The following provides connection diagrams for each cable, connector specifications and other information. Connection cable Model name RS-232 cable RS-422 cable (Refer to Section20.2.1)

  • Page 831: Rs-232 Cable

    20.2.1 RS-232 cable The following shows the connection diagrams and connector specifications of the RS-232 cable used for connectiong the GOT to a temperature controller. Connection diagram (1) RS-232 cable 1) GOT side OMRON product side Cable connection and signal direction Signal name Pin No.
  • Page 832 Connector specifications (1) GOT side connector Use the following as the RS-232 interface and RS-232 communication unit connector on the GOT. For the GOT side of the RS-232 cable, use a connector or connector cover applicable to the GOT connector. (a) Connector type 9-pin D-sub (male) inch screw fixed type (b) Connector model...

  • Page 833: Rs-485 Cable

    20.2.2 RS-485 cable The following shows the connection diagrams and connector specifications of the RS-485 cable used for connecting the GOT to a temparature controller. Connection diagram (1) RS-485 cable1) Terminating resistor (120 1/2W)* Interface converter Temperature Temperature controller side (K3SC-10) controller side Signal name...
  • Page 834 (2) RS-485 cable 2) Terminating resistor (120 1/2W) Temperature Temperature Temperature controller side controller side controller side GOT side Signal name Signal name Signal name Pin No. Signal name B(+) B(+) B(+) SDA1 A(-) A(-) A(-) SDB1 RDA1 RDB1 SDA2 SDB2 RDA2 RDB2...
  • Page 835 Connector specifications (1) GOT side connector Use the following as the RS-422/485 communication unit connector on the GOT. For the GOT side of the RS-485 cable, use the terminal block packed together with the RS-422/485 communication unit. Connector model Connector type Manufacturer GT15-RS4-TE SL-SMT3.5/10/90F BOX...

  • Page 836: Preparatory Procedures For Monitoring

    20.3 Preparatory Procedures for Monitoring The following shows the procedures to be taken before monitoring and corresponding reference sections. Section 20.3.1 Install the OS onto the GOT. Installing OS onto GOT Section 20.3.2 Make sure that the OS is installed on the GOT. Checking OS installation on GOT Section 20.3.3 Set the communication interface.

  • Page 837: Installing Os Onto Got

    20.3.1 Installing OS onto GOT Install the standard monitor OS, communication driver and option OS onto the GOT. For the OS installation methods, refer to the following manual. GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual Check the following under the Communication driver. •...

  • Page 838: Checking Os Installation On Got

    20.3.2 Checking OS installation on GOT Check if the OS is properly installed or not on the Drive information tab of GT Designer2. For the operation on the Drive information tab, refer to the following manual. GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual The OS has been installed successfully on the GOT if the following can be confirmed: 1) Satndard monitor OS...

  • Page 839: Setting Communication Interface (Communication Settings)

    20.3.3 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) Make the GOT communication interface settings on [Communication setting] of GT Designer2. Select the same communication driver as the one installed on the GOT for each communication interface. For details on [Communication setting] of GT Designer2, refer to the following manual. GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual Communication settings...
  • Page 840 Communication detail settings Item Description Range Set this item when change the transmission speed used for 9600bps,19200bps,38400bps,57600bps, Transmission Speed communication with the connected equipment. 115200bps <Default: 9600bps> Set this item when change the data length used for communi- Data Bit cation with the connected equipment.
  • Page 841 (1) Delay time When connecting to the temperature controller E5ZN, set the delay time to 5ms or more. (2) Format setting The compatible format of temperature controller differs depending on models. Model Compatible format E5AN, E5CN, E5EN, E5GN Format 1 only E5ZN Format 1 or Format 2 For the continuous access and random access of the temperature controller, refer...

  • Page 842: Downloading Project Data

    20.3.4 Downloading project data Download project data to the GOT. For how to download project data, refer to the following manual. GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual Check the necessary items and click the button. Download Download 20 - 20 20.3 Preparatory Procedures for Monitoring 20.3.4 Downloading project data...

  • Page 843: Attaching Communication Unit And Connecting Cable

    20.3.5 Attaching communication unit and connecting cable Cautions when attaching the communication unit and connecting the cable Shut off all phases of the GOT power supply before attaching the communication unit and connecting the cable. Attaching the communication unit Attach the serial communication unit to the extension unit connector on the GOT.
  • Page 844 How to connect the cable (1) How to connect the RS-232 cable (a) For the GT15 • connection to the RS-232 interface Connect the RS-232 cable to the RS-232 interface on the GOT. •connection to the RS-232 communication unit Connect the RS-232 cable to the RS-232 communication unit on the GOT.
  • Page 845 (2) How to connect the RS-485 cable Connect the RS-485 cable to the terminal block packed together with the RS-422/485 communication unit. Connect the terminal block to theRS-422/485 communication unit on the GOT. 20 - 23 20.3 Preparatory Procedures for Monitoring 20.3.5 Attaching communication unit and connecting cable...

  • Page 846: Verifying Got Recognizes Connected Equipment

    20.3.6 Verifying GOT recognizes connected equipment Verify the GOT recognizes connected equipments on [Communication setting] of the Utility. • Channel number of communication interface, communication drivers allocation status • Communication unit installation status Remark How to display Utility(at default), utility call key 1-point press on GOT screen upper-left corner When using GT1595-X Utility display...
  • Page 847 After powering up the GOT, touch [Main Menu] [Communication setting] from the Utility. The [Communication setting] appears. Verify that the following communication driver name is displayed in the box for the communication interface to be used. • Communication driver: OMRON THERMAC/INPANEL NEO When the communication driver name is not displayed normally, carry out the following procedure again.

  • Page 848: Checking For Normal Monitoring

    20.3.7 Checking for normal monitoring Check for errors occurring on the GOT. Presetting the system alarm to project data allows you to identify errors occurred on the GOT, PLC CPU, servo amplifier and communications. For details on the system alarm, refer to the following manual. User’s Manual (When using GT15) Communication...
  • Page 849 Perform an I/O check Whether the PLC can communicate with the GOT or not can be checked by the I/O check function. If this check ends successfully, it means correct communication interface settings and proper cable connection. Display the I/O check screen by [Main Menu] [Debug &...

  • Page 850: Temperature Controller Side Setting

    20.4 Temperature Controller Side Setting OMRON temperature controller For details of OMRON temperature controller, refer to the following manual. User's Manual for the OMRON temperature controller Model name Reference E5AN, E5EN, E5CN, E5GN Section 20.4.1 Temperature controller E5ZN Section 20.4.2 Interface converter K3SC-10 Section 20.4.3...

  • Page 851: Connecting To Interface Converter (K3Sc-10)

    20.4.3 Connecting to interface converter (K3SC-10) Communication settings Make the communication settings by operating the DIP switch of the temperature controller. Item Set value 19200bps, 38400bps Transmission speed 7 bits, 8 bits Data length Odd, even, none Parity bit 1 bit, 2 bits Stop bit Master/slave device RS-232...
  • Page 852 (2) Settings of data length, parity bit, stop bit, master/slave device and echoback Switch Setting item Set value 7bits Data length 8bits 2bits Stop bit 1bits Even Parity None RS232 RS422 Master/slave Set these switches. device RS-232 RS485 Without Echoback With 20 - 30 20.4 Temperature Controller Side Setting...

  • Page 853: Station No. Settings

    20.4.4 Station NO. settings Set each station number while making sure that one station number is used only once. The station number can be set without regard to the cable connection order. No problem is expected even if station numbers are not consecutive. Station No.3 Station No.0 Station No.1...

  • Page 854: Precautions

    20.5 Precautions Station number setting of the temperature controller system Make sure to establish temperature controller system with No.1 station. GOT clock function Since the temperature controller does not have a clock function, the settings of “time adjusting” or “time broad cast”...

  • Page 855: List Of Functions Added By Version Upgrade

    20.6 List of Functions Added by Version Upgrade The following describes the function added by version upgrade of GT Designer2 or OS. For using the function below, use the GT Designer2 or OS of the stated version or later. Version of GT Item Description Version of OS...
  • Page 856 MEMO 20 - 34...
  • Page 857 CONNECTION TO YAMATAKE TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 21.1 System Configuration... page 21-2 This section describes the equipment and cables needed when connecting a GOT to a YAMATAKE temperature controller. Select a system suitable for your application. 21.2 Connection Cable.

  • Page 858: System Configuration

    21.1 System Configuration Select a system configuration suitable for your application. Conventions used in this section Numbers (e.g. ) of System configuration and connection conditions correspond to the numbers (e.g. ) of System equipment. Use these numbers as references when confirming models and applications. 21.1.1 Connecting to DMC10 Communication driver YAMATAKE SDC/DMC...
  • Page 859 System equipment (1) GOT Image Name Model name RS-232 RS-232 interface (Built into GOT) • For RS-232 communication RS-232 RS-232 RS-232 Communication Unit GT15-RS2-9P • For RS-232 communication RS-422/485 RS-422/485 RS-422/485 Communication Unit GT15-RS4-TE • For RS-485 communication (2) Temperature controller Image Name Model name...

  • Page 860: Connecting To Sdc15, Sdc25/26 Or Sdc35/36

    21.1.2 Connecting to SDC15, SDC25/26 or SDC35/36 Communication driver YAMATAKE SDC/DMC System configuration and connection conditions Connection conditions Number of System configuration Number of Communi Temperature Distance GOTs -cation controllers Interface converter 31 (max.) RS-232 15m or less RS-232 cable 1) RS-485 cable 1) 31 (max.) RS-485...
  • Page 861 System equipment (1) GOT Image Name Model name RS-232 RS-232 interface (Built into GOT) • For RS-232 communication RS-232 RS-232 RS-232 Communication Unit GT15-RS2-9P • For RS-232 communication RS-422/485 RS-422/485 RS-422/485 Communication Unit GT15-RS4-TE • For RS-485 communication (2) Temperature controller Image Name Model name...

  • Page 862: Connecting To Sdc20/21

    21.1.3 Connecting to SDC20/21 Communication driver YAMATAKE SDC/DMC System configuration and connection conditions Connection conditions Number of System configuration Number of Communi temperature Distance GOTs -cation controllers RS-232 cable 2) RS-232 15m or less MAX15m Interface converter 31 (max.) RS-232 15m or less RS-232 cable 1) RS-485 cable 2)
  • Page 863 System equipment (1) GOT Image Name Model name RS-232 RS-232 interface (Built into GOT) • For RS-232 communication RS-232 RS-232 RS-232 Communication Unit GT15-RS2-9P • For RS-232 communication RS-422 RS-422 interface (Built into GOT) • For RS-485 communication RS-422/485 RS-422/485 RS-422/485 Communication Unit GT15-RS4-9S •...
  • Page 864 (3) Cable Image Name Model name RS-232 cable 2) • Between temperature controller and GOT RS-232 cable 1) • Between interface converter and GOT RS-485 cable 2) • Between temperature (To be prepared by the user. Section 21.2 Connection Cable) controller and interface converter RS-485 cable 4)

  • Page 865: Connecting To Sdc30/31

    21.1.4 Connecting to SDC30/31 Communication driver YAMATAKE SDC/DMC System configuration and connection conditions Connection conditions Number of System configuration Number of temperature Communi Distance GOTs controller -cation connection Interface converter 31 (max.) RS-232 15m or less RS-232 cable 1) 31 (max.) RS-485 500m or less RS-485 cable 2)
  • Page 866 System equipment (1) GOT Image Name Model name RS-232 RS-232 interface (Built into GOT) • For RS-232 communication RS-232 RS-232 RS-232 Communication Unit GT15-RS2-9P • For RS-232 communication RS-422 RS-422 interface (Built into GOT) • For RS-485 communication RS-422/485 RS-422/485 RS-422/485 Communication Unit GT15-RS4-9S •...

  • Page 867: Connecting To Sdc40A/40B/40G

    21.1.5 Connecting to SDC40A/40B/40G Communication driver YAMATAKE SDC/DMC System configuration and connection conditions Connection conditions Number of System configuration Number of Communi Temperature Distance GOTs cation controllers RS-232 cable 2) RS-232 15m or less MAX15m Interface converter 31 (max.) RS-232 15m or less RS-232 cable 1) RS-485 cable 2)
  • Page 868 System equipment (1) GOT Image Name Model name RS-232 RS-232 interface (Built into GOT) • For RS-232 communication RS-232 RS-232 RS-232 Communication Unit GT15-RS2-9P • For RS-232 communication RS-422 RS-422 interface (Built into GOT) • For RS-485 communication RS-422/485 RS-422/485 RS-422/485 Communication Unit GT15-RS4-9S •...
  • Page 869 (3) Cable Image Name Model name RS-232 cable 2) • Between temperature controller and GOT RS-232 cable 1) • Between interface converter and GOT RS-485 cable 2) • Between temperature (To be prepared by the user. Section 21.2 Connection Cable) controller and interface converter RS-485 cable 4)

  • Page 870: Connection Cable

    21.2 Connection Cable The RS-232 cable or RS-485 cable used for connecting the GOT to the PLC should be prepared by the user. The following provides connection diagrams for each cable, connector specifications and other information. Connection cable Model name RS-232 cable RS-485 cable (Refer to 21.2.1)

  • Page 871: Rs-232 Cable

    21.2.1 RS-232 cable The following shows the connection diagrams and connector specifications of the RS-232 cable used for connecting the GOT to a temperature controller. Connection diagram (1) RS-232 cable 1) YAMATAKE product side Interface converter(CMC10L) GOT side TERMINAL Cable connection and signal direction Mode *1 Signal name Signal name...
  • Page 872 (2) RS-232 cable 2) Pin No. of temperature controller differs depending on model and optional function model. Refer to the following table. The numbers in ( ) of the following table correspond to optional function models. YAMATAKE product side Model of temperature controller GOT side SDC20 SDC21...
  • Page 873 Connector specifications (1) GOT side connector Use the following as the RS-232 interface and RS-232 communication unit connector on the GOT. For the GOT side of the RS-232 cable, use a connector or connector cover applicable to the GOT connector. (a) Connector type 9-pin D-sub (male) inch screw fixed type (b) Connector model...

  • Page 874: Rs-485 Cable

    21.2.2 RS-485 cable The following shows the connection diagrams and connector specifications of the RS-485 cable used for connecting the GOT to a temperature controller. Connection diagram (1) RS-485 cable 1) Temperature Communication Temperature controller side controller side controller side (CMC10L) Signal name Signal name...
  • Page 875 (2) RS-485 cable 2) Terminating resistor (120 1/2W)*2 Communication Temperature Temperature controller side controller side (CMC10L) controller side Pin No. Signal name Signal name Signal name Pin No. of temperature controller differs depending on model or optional function model. Refer to the following table.
  • Page 876 (3) RS-485 cable 3) Temperature Temperature controller side controller side GOT side Signal name Signal name Pin No. Signal name SDA1 SDB1 RDA1 RDB1 SDA2 SDB2 RDA2 RDB2 Pin No. of temperature controller differs depending on model. Refer to the following table. Model of temperature controller Signal...
  • Page 877 (4) RS-485 cable 4) Terminating resistor (120 1/2W) Temperature Temperature controller side controller side GOT side Signal name Signal name Signal name Pin No. Pin No. of temperature controller differs depending on model or optional function model. Refer to the following table.
  • Page 878 (5) RS-485 cable 5) Terminating resistor (120 1/2W) Temperature Temperature controller side controller side GOT side Signal name Signal name Signal name Pin No. SDA1 SDB1 RDA1 RDB1 SDA2 SDB2 RDA2 RDB2 Pin No. of temperature controller differs depending on model or optional function model. Refer to the following table.
  • Page 879 Connector specifications (1) GOT side connector Use the following as the RS-422/485 communication unit connector on the GOT. For the GOT side of the RS-422 cable, use a connector or connector cover applicable to the GOT connector. Connector model Connector type Manufacturer GT11 17LE-13090-27(D3AC)

  • Page 880: Preparatory Procedures For Monitoring

    21.3 Preparatory Procedures for Monitoring The following shows the procedures to be taken before monitoring and corresponding reference sections. Section 21.3.1 Install the OS onto the GOT. Installing OS onto GOT Section 21.3.2 Make sure that the OS is installed on the GOT. Checking OS installation on GOT Section 21.3.3 Set the communication interface.

  • Page 881: Installing Os Onto Got

    21.3.1 Installing OS onto GOT Install the standard monitor OS, communication driver and option OS onto the GOT. For the OS installation methods, refer to the following manual. GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual Check the following under the Communication •...

  • Page 882: Checking Os Installation On Got

    21.3.2 Checking OS installation on GOT Check if the OS is properly installed or not on the Drive information tab of GT Designer2. For the operation on the Drive information tab, refer to the following manual. GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual The OS has been installed successfully on the G if the following can be confirmed: 1) Satndard monitor OS...

  • Page 883: Setting Communication Interface (Communication Settings)

    21.3.3 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) Make the GOT communication interface settings on [Communication setting] of GT Designer2. Select the same communication driver as the one installed on the GOT for each communication interface. For details on [Communication setting] of GT Designer2, refer to the following manual. GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual Communication settings...
  • Page 884 Communication detail settings Item Description Range Set this item when change the transmission speed used for 9600bps,19200bps,38400bps, Transmission Speed communication with the connected equipment. 57600bps,115200bps <Default: 9600bps> Set this item when change the data length used for communi- Data Bit cation with the connected equipment.
  • Page 885 Format setting The compatible format of temperature controller differs depending on model. Model Compatible format SDC20/21, SDC30/31, SDC40A/40B/40G Format 1 only DMC10, SDC15, SDC25/26, SDC35/36 Format 1 or Format 2 For the continuous access and random access of the temperature controller, refer to the following manual.

  • Page 886: Downloading Project Data

    21.3.4 Downloading project data Download project data to the GOT. For how to download project data, refer to the following manual. GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual Check the necessary items and click the button. Download Download 21 - 30 21.3 Preparatory Procedures for Monitoring 21.3.4 Downloading project data...

  • Page 887: Attaching Communication Unit And Connecting Cable

    21.3.5 Attaching communication unit and connecting cable Caoutions when attaching the communication unit and connecting the cable Shut off all phases of the GOT power supply before attaching the communicaation unit and connecting the cable. Attaching the communication unit Attach the serial communication unit to the extension unit connector on the GOT.
  • Page 888 How to connect the cable (1) How to connect the RS-232 cable (a) For the GT15 •Connection to the RS-232 interface Connect the RS-232 cable to the RS-232 interface on the GOT •Connection to the RS-232 communication unit Connect the RS-232 cable to the RS-232 communication unit on the GOT.
  • Page 889 (2) How to connect the RS-485 cable (a) For the GT15 •Connection to the RS-422/485 communication unit (model:GT15-RS4-9P) Connect the RS-485 cable to the RS-422/485 communication unit on the GOT. •Connection to the RS-422/485 communication unit (model:GT15-RS4-9E) Connect the RS-485 cable to the terminal block enclosed by the RS-422/485 communication unit.

  • Page 890: Verifying Got Recognizes Connected Equipment

    21.3.6 Verifying GOT recognizes connected equipment Verify the GOT recognizes connected equipments on [Communication setting] of the Utility. • Channel number of communication interface, communication drivers allocation status • Communication unit installation status Remark How to display Utility(at default), utility call key 1-point press on GOT screen upper-left corner When using GT1595-X Utility display...
  • Page 891 After powering up the GOT, touch [Main Menu] [Communication setting] from the Utility. The [Communication setting] appears. Verify that the following communication driver name is displayed in the box for the communication interface to be used. • Communication driver: YAMATAKE SDC/DMC When the communication driver name is not displayed normally, carry out the...

  • Page 892: Checking For Normal Monitoring

    21.3.7 Checking for normal monitoring Check for errors occurring on the GOT. Presetting the system alarm to project data allows you to identify errors occurred on the GOT, PLC CPU, servo amplifier and communications. For details on the system alarm, refer to the following manual. User’s Manual (When using GT15) Communication...
  • Page 893 Perform an I/O check Whether the PLC can communicate with the GOT or not can be checked by the I/O check function. If this check ends successfully, it means correct communication interface settings and proper cable connection. Display the I/O check screen by [Main Menu] [Debug &...

  • Page 894: Temperature Controller Side Setting

    21.4 Temperature Controller Side Setting (1) YAMATAKE temperature controller For details of YAMATAKE temperature controller, refer to the following manual. User's Manual for the YAMATAKE temperature controller Model name Reference DMC10 Section 21.4.1 SDC15, SDC25/26, SDC35/36 Section 21.4.3 Temperature controller SDC20/21 Section 21.4.4 SDC30/31...

  • Page 895: Connecting Sdc40A/40B/40G

    21.4.2 Connecting SDC40A/40B/40G Communication settings Make the communication settings by operating the key of the temperature controller. Setting items Set value 9600bps Transmission speed Data length 8 bits Even, none Parity bit Stop bit 1bits, 2bits *2*3 0 to 127 Station address Set the transmission speed according to the baud rate of the GOT side.

  • Page 896: Connecting Sdc20/21, Sdc30/31

    21.4.4 Connecting SDC20/21, SDC30/31 Communication settings Make the communication settings by operating the key of the temperature controller. Setting items Set value 9600bps Transmission speed Data length 8 bits Parity bit None Stop bit 2 bits *2*3 0 to 127 Station address Set the transmission speed according to the baud rate of the GOT side.
  • Page 897 (1) DIP switch settings (a) Transmission speed settings Switch No. Transmission speed(bps) Set these switches 9600 19200 38400 (b) Frame length settings Switch No. Frame length 8 bits 9 bits 10 bits Set these switches 11 bits 12 bits 13 bits 14 bits 15 bits (c) Terminating resistor settings...

  • Page 898: Station No. Settings

    21.4.6 Station NO. settings Set each station number while making sure that one station number is used only once. The station number can be set without regard to the cable connection order. No problem is expected even if station numbers are not consecutive. Station No.3 Station No.0 Station No.1 Station No.15 Station No.6...

  • Page 899: Precautions

    21.5 Precautions Station number setting of the temperature controller system Make sure to establish temperature controller system with No.1 station. GOT clock function Since the temperature controller does not have a clock function, the settings of “time adjusting” or “time broad cast”...

  • Page 900: List Of Functions Added By Version Upgrade

    21.6 List of Functions Added by Version Upgrade The following describes the function added by version upgrade of GT Designer2 or OS. For using the function below, use the GT Designer2 or OS of the stated version or later. Version of GT item Description Version of OS...
  • Page 901 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 22.1 System Configuration... page 22-2 This section describes the equipment and cables needed when connecting a GOT to a RKC temperature controller. Select a system suitable for your application. 22.2 Connection Cable.
  • Page 902 22.1 System Configuration Select a system configuration suitable for your application. Conventions used in this section Numbers (e.g. ) of System configuration and connection conditions correspond to the numbers (e.g. ) of System equipment. Use these numbers as references when confirming models and applications. 22.1.1 Connecting to H-PCP-J Communication driver SR Mini HG(MODBUS)
  • Page 903 Connection conditions Numbe of System configuration Numbe of Temperature Distance controller RS-422 cable 1) COM.PORT1 COM.PORT2 1200m or FAIL FAIL FAIL FAIL FAIL FAIL FAIL FAIL FAIL FAIL FAIL FAIL FAIL FAIL FAIL 16 (max.) less RS-422 cable 2) MAX1200m RS-485 cable 1) COM.PORT1 COM.PORT2...
  • Page 904 System equipment (1) GOT Image Name Model name RS-232 RS-232 interface (Built into GOT) • For RS-232 Communication RS-232 RS-232 RS-232 Communication Unit GT15-RS2-9P • For RS-232 Communication RS-232 RS-422 conversion unit*1 GT15-RS2T4-9P • For RS-422 Communication RS-422/485 RS-422/485 RS-422/485 Communication Unit GT15-RS4-9S •...
  • Page 905 (3) Cable Image Name Model name RS-232 cable 1) W-BF-28-0500(0.5m), W-BF-28-1000(1m), W-BF-28-3000(3m) • Between temperature controller and GOT RS-232 cable 2) • Between conversion W-BF-02-0500(0.5m), W-BF-02-1000(1m), W-BF-02-3000(3m) connector temperature controller RS-422 cable 1) • Between temperature (To be prepared by the user. Section 22.2 Connection Cable ) controller and GOT RS-485 cable 1)
  • Page 906 22.1.2 Connecting to H-PCP-A or H-PCP-B Communication driver SR Mini HG(MODBUS) System configuration and connection conditions Connection conditions Number of System configuration Number of Temperature Distance controllers Modular connector 1 RS-232 cable 1) 15m or less MAX15m Modular connector 1 RS-232 cable 2) 15m or less Conversion connector...
  • Page 907 System equipment (1) GOT Image Name Model name RS-232 RS-232 interface (Built into GOT) • For RS-232 communication RS-232 RS-232 RS-232 Communication Unit GT15-RS2-9P • For RS-232 communication RS-232 RS-422 conversion unit GT15-RS2T4-9P • For RS-422 communication RS-422/485 RS-422/485 RS-422/485 Communication Unit GT15-RS4-9S •...
  • Page 908 (3) Cable Image Name Model name RS-232 cable 1) W-BF-28-0500(0.5m), W-BF-28-1000(1m), W-BF-28-3000(3m) • Between temperature controller and GOT RS-232 cable 2) • Between conversion W-BF-02-0500(0.5m), W-BF-02-1000(1m), W-BF-02-3000(3m) connector temperature controller RS-422 cable 1) • Between temperature (To be prepared by the user. Section 22.2 Connection Cable ) controller and GOT RS-422 cable 2)
  • Page 909 22.2 Connection Cable The RS-232 cable or RS-422 cable, or RS-485 cable used for connecting the GOT to the temperature con- troller should be prepared by the user. The following provides connection diagrams for each cable, connector specifications and other information. Connection cable Model name RS-232 cable...
  • Page 910 22.2.1 RS-232 cable The following shows the connection diagrams and connector specifications of the RS-232 cable used for connecting the GOT to a temperature controller. Connection diagram (1) RS-232 cable 1) RKC product side GOT side (Modular connector) Cable connection and signal direction Signal Signal name Pin No.
  • Page 911 Connector specifications (1) GOT side connector Use the following as the RS-232 interface and RS-232 communication unit connector on the GOT. For the GOT side of the RS-232 cable, use a connector or connector cover applicable to the GOT connector. (a) Connector type 9-pin D-sub (male) inch screw fixed type (b) Connector model...
  • Page 912 22.2.2 RS-422 cable The following shows the connection diagrams and connector specifications of the RS-422 cable used for connecting the GOT to a temperature controller. Differences in polarity between GOT and RKC products The polarity of poles A and B in signal names is reversed between GOT and RKC products.
  • Page 913 Connector specifications (1) GOT side connector Use the following as the RS-422/485 communication unit connector on the GOT. For the GOT side of the RS-422 cable, use a connector or connector cover applicable to the GOT connector. Connector model Connector type Manufacturer RS-422 conversion unit 17LE-13090-27(D3AC)
  • Page 914 22.2.3 RS-485 cable The following shows the connection diagrams and connector specifications of the RS-485 cable used for connecting the GOT to a temperature controller. Connection diagram (1) RS-485 cable 1) RKC product side GOT side (Modular connector) (Terminal block) Cable connection and signal direction Signal Signal name...
  • Page 915 Connector specifications (1) GOT side connector Use the following as the RS-422/485 communication unit connector on the GOT. For the GOT side of the RS-485 cable, use the terminal block packed together with the RS-422/485 communication unit. Connector model Connector type Manufacturer GT15-RS4-TE SL-SMT3.5/10/90F BOX...
  • Page 916 22.3 Preparatory Procedures for Monitoring The following shows the procedures to be taken before monitoring and corresponding reference sections. Section 22.3.1 Install the OS onto the GOT. Installing OS onto GOT Section 22.3.2 Make sure that the OS is installed on the GOT. Checking OS installation on GOT Section 22.3.3 Set the communication interface.
  • Page 917 22.3.1 Installing OS onto GOT Install the standard monitor OS, communication driver and option OS onto the GOT. For the OS installation methods, refer to the following manual. GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual Check the following under the Communication driver. •...
  • Page 918 22.3.2 Checking OS installation on GOT Check if the OS is properly installed or not on the Drive information tab of GT Designer2. For the operation on the Drive information tab, refer to the following manual. GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual The OS has been installed successfu if the following can be confirmed: 1) Satndard monitor OS...
  • Page 919 22.3.3 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) Make the GOT communication interface settings on [Communication setting] of GT Designer2. Select the same communication driver as the one installed on the GOT for each communication interface. For details on [Communication setting] of GT Designer2, refer to the following manual. GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual Communication settings...
  • Page 920 Communication detail settings Item Description Range Set this item when change the transmission speed used for 9600bps,19200bps,38400bps, Transmission Speed communication with the connected equipment. 57600bps,115200bps <Default: 9600bps> Set this item when change the data length used for communi- Data Bit cation with the connected equipment.
  • Page 921 (1) Communication interface setting by Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility's "Communication setting" after downloading "Communication setting" of project data. For details on the Utility, refer to the following manual. User's Manual (2) Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer or the Utility, the latest setting is effective.
  • Page 922 22.3.4 Downloading project data Download project data to the GOT. For how to download project data, refer to the following manual. GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual Check the necessary items and click the button. Download Download 22 - 22 22.3 Preparatory Procedures for Monitoring 22.3.4 Downloading project data...
  • Page 923 22.3.5 Attaching communication unit and connecting cable Cautions when attaching the communication unit and connecting the cable Shut off all phases of the GOT power supply before attaching the communication unit and connecting the cable. Attaching the communication unit Attach the serial communication unit to the extension unit connector on the GOT.
  • Page 924 How to connect the cable (1) How to connect the RS-232 cable (a) For the GT15 • connection to the RS-232 interface Connect the RS-232 cable to the RS-232 interface on the GOT. • connection to the RS-232 communication unit Connect the RS-232 cable to the RS-232 communication unit on the GOT.
  • Page 925 (2) How to connect the RS-422 cable (a) For the GT15 • connection to the RS-232 interface Connect the RS-422 conversion unit to the RS- 232 interface on the GOT. Connect the RS-422 cable to the RS-422 conversion unit. • connection to the RS-422/485 communication unit Connect the RS-232 cable to the RS-232 communication unit on the GOT.
  • Page 926 When using the RS-422 conversion unit On "Communication settings" on the utility, make setting so that 5V DC power is supplied to the RS-422 conversion unit from the RS-232 interface on the GOT. For details on the utility, refer to the following manual: User's Manual Touch [5V supply].
  • Page 927 (3) How to connect the RS-485 cable Connect the RS-485 cable to the terminal block packed together with the RS-422/485 communication unit. Connect the terminal block to theRS-422/485 communication unit on the GOT. 22 - 27 22.3 Preparatory Procedures for Monitoring 22.3.5 Attaching communication unit and connecting cable...
  • Page 928 22.3.6 Verifying GOT recognizes connected equipment Verify the GOT recognizes connected equipments on [Communication setting] of the Utility. • Channel number of communication interface, communication drivers allocation status • Communication unit installation status Remark How to display Utility(at default), utility call key 1-point press on GOT screen upper-left corner When using GT1595-X Utility display...
  • Page 929 After powering up the GOT, touch [Main Menu] [Communication setting] from the Utility. The [Communication setting] appears. Verify that the following communication driver name is displayed in the box for the communication interface to be used. • Communication driver: RKC SR Mini HG(MODBUS) When the communication driver name is not displayed normally, carry out the following procedure again.
  • Page 930 22.3.7 Checking for normal monitoring Check for errors occurring on the GOT. Presetting the system alarm to project data allows you to identify errors occurred on the GOT, PLC CPU, servo amplifier and communications. For details on the system alarm, refer to the following manual. User’s Manual (When using GT15) Communication...
  • Page 931 Perform an I/O check Whether the PLC can communicate with the GOT or not can be checked by the I/O check function. If this check ends successfully, it means correct communication interface settings and proper cable connection. Display the I/O check screen by [Main Menu] [Debug &...
  • Page 932 22.4 Temperature Controller Side Setting RKC temperature controller For details of RKC temperature controller, refer to the following manual. User's Manual for the RKC temperature controller Model name Reference H-PCP-J Section 22.4.1 Temperature controller H-PCP-A, H-PCP-B Section 22.4.2 22.4.1 Connecting to H-PCP-J Communication settings Make the communication settings of the temperature controller.
  • Page 933 (1) Transmission speed settings (a) COM.PORT1/COM.PORT2 Communication speed 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps (b) COM.PORT3 Communication speed 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps (2) Communication mode settings (a) COM.PORT1/COM.PORT2 Communication protocol MODBUS protocol (b) COM.PORT3 Communication protocol MODBUS protocol 22 - 33 22.4 Temperature Controller Side Setting 22.4.1 Connecting to H-PCP-J...
  • Page 934 (3) Settings of data length, parity bit, and stop bit (a) COM.PORT1/COM.PORT2 Data bit configuration Data 8-bit, Non parity, Stop 1 bit (b) COM.PORT3 Data bit configuration Data 8-bit, Non parity, Stop 1 bit Unit address settings Set the unit address using the unit address setting switch. Unit address setting switch Setting range: 0 to F 22 - 34...
  • Page 935 22.4.2 Connecting to H-PCP-A, H-PCP-B Communication settings Make the communication settings of the temperature controller. Setting item Set value 9600bps, 19200bps Transmission speed Data length 8bits Parity bit None 0 to F Unit address Make the same setting as that of the GOT side. Select the unit address without overlapping with that of other units.
  • Page 936 Unit address settings Set the unit address using the unit address setting switch. Unit address setting switch Setting range: 0 to F 22 - 36 22.4 Temperature Controller Side Setting 22.4.2 Connecting to H-PCP-A, H-PCP-B...
  • Page 937 22.4.3 Station No. settings Set each station number while making sure that one station number is used only once. The station number can be set without regard to the cable connection order. No problem is expected even if station numbers are not consecutive. Station No.3 Station No.0 Station No.1...
  • Page 938 22.5 Precautions Station number setting of the temperature controller system Make sure to establish temperature controller system with No.01 station. GOT clock function Since the temperature controller does not have a clock function, the settings of “time adjusting” or “time broad cast”...
  • Page 939 22.6 List of Functions Added by Version Upgrade The following describes the function added by version upgrade of GT Designer2 or OS. For using the function below, use the GT Designer2 or OS of the stated version or later. Version of GT Item Description Version of OS...
  • Page 940 MEMO 22 - 40...
  • Page 941 OTHER CONNECTIONS Chapter 23 INVERTER CONNECTION Chapter 24 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION Chapter 25 BAR CODE READER CONNECTION Chapter 26 PRINTER CONNECTION Chapter 27 CNC CONNECTION...
  • Page 942 MEMO...
  • Page 943 INVERTER CONNECTION 23.1 System Configuration ..page 23-2 This section describes the equipment and cables needed when connecting a GOT to a FREQOL SERIES INVERTER. Select a system suitable for your application. 23.2 Connection Cable .
  • Page 944 23.1 System Configuration Select a system configuration suitable for your application. Conventions used in this section Numbers (e.g. ) of System configuration and connection conditions correspond to the numbers (e.g. ) of System equipment. Use these numbers as references when confirming models and applications. 23.1.1 Connecting to FREQROL A500/F500 Communication driver FREQROL 500/700...
  • Page 945 Connection conditions System configuration Number of Number of Distance GOTs inverters 10 (max.) 10 (max.) 500m or less RS-422 cable 3) RS-422 cable 7) RS-422 cable 1) Distributor Distributor Distributor MAX500m 10 (max.) 10 (max.) 500m or less Computer link Computer link R SG A B C...
  • Page 946 System equipment (1) GOT Image Name Model name RS-232 RS-422 conversion unit GT15-RS2T4-9P • For RS-422 communication RS-422/485 RS-422/485 RS-422/485 Communication Unit GT15-RS4-9S • For RS-422 communication RS-422 RS-422 interface (Built into GOT) • For RS-422 communication Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). (2) Inverter Image Name...
  • Page 947 23.1.2 Connecting to FREQROL E500/S500 Communication driver FREQROL 500/700 System configuration and connection conditions Connection conditions System configuration Number of Number of Distance GOTs inverters RS-422 cable 1) 500m or less MAX500m 10 (max.) 10 (max.) 500m or less RS-422 cable 3) RS-422 cable 1) RS-422 cable 1) Distributor...
  • Page 948 System equipment (1) GOT Image Name Model name RS-232 RS-422 conversion unit GT15-RS2T4-9P • For RS-422 communication RS-422/485 RS-422/485 RS-422/485 Communication Unit GT15-RS4-9S • For RS-422 communication RS-422 RS-422 interface (Built into GOT) • For RS-422 communication Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). (2) Inverter Image Name...
  • Page 949 23.1.3 Connecting to FREQROL A700/F700 Communication driver FREQROL 500/700 System configuration and connection conditions Connection conditions System configuration Number of Number of Distance inverters RS-422 cable 1) 500m or less MAX500m 500m or less RS-485 cable 5) MAX500m 10 (max.) 10 (max.) 500m or less RS-422 cable 3)
  • Page 950 System equipment (1) GOT Image Name Model name RS-232 RS-422 conversion unit GT15-RS2T4-9P • For RS-422 communication RS-422/485 RS-422/485 RS-422/485 Communication Unit GT15-RS4-9S • For RS-422 communication RS-422 RS-422 interface (Built into GOT) • For RS-422 communication Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). (2) Inverter Image Name...
  • Page 951 23.2 Connection Cable The RS-422 cable used for connecting the GOT to the inverter should be prepared by the user. The following provides connection diagrams for each cable, connector specifications and other information. Connection cable Model name RS-422 cable (Section 23.2) A500/F500 RS-422 cable 1), RS-422 cable 2), RS-422 cable 4) FREQROL...
  • Page 952 (2) RS-422 cable 2) GOT side FR-A5NR side Cable connection and signal direction Signal (Terminal Pin No. name block) (3) RS-422 cable 3) Distributor side inverter side or distributor side (Modular connector) (Modular connector) Cable connection and signal direction Signal Signal Pin No.
  • Page 953 (4) RS-422 cable 4) FR-A5NR side FR-A5NR side FR-A5NR side (Terminal block) (Terminal block) (Terminal block) Station No.1 Station No.n Station No.0 GOT side Signal name Pin No. Terminating resistor • Connect a terminating resistor (100 ohm) to RDB and RDR which are assigned in the FR-A5NR of the inverter located farthest from the GOT.
  • Page 954 (6) RS-422 cable 6) RS485 terminall block RS485 terminall block RS485 terminall block (built into the inverter) (built into the inverter) (built into the inverter) Station No.0 Station No.1 Station No.n VCC RXD TXD VCC RXD TXD VCC RXD TXD GOT side Signal name Pin No.
  • Page 955 Name Model name Specifications Manufacture Connector 5-554720-3 RJ45 conector Tyco International, Ltd Modular ceiling rossette BMJ-8 HACHIKO ELECTRIC CO.,LTD. Cable conforming to EIA568 MITSUBISHI CABLE INDUSTRIES, Cable SGLPEV 0.5mm (such as cable 10BASE-T) LTD. 23 - 13 23.2 Connection Cable...
  • Page 956 (3) Terminal block layout in the FR-A5NR computer link option Attach this option to the A500 and F500 Series. Terminal block Screw size: M3 RDA RDB RDR SG Terminal symbol Connected to the GOT Precations when preparing a cable The length of the RS-422 cable must be 1200m or less. Connecting terminating resistors (1) GOT Set the terminating resistor of RS-422/485 communication unit using the terminating resistor...
  • Page 957 23.3 Preparatory Procedures for Monitoring The following shows the procedures to be taken before monitoring and corresponding reference sections. Section 23.3.1 Install the OS onto the GOT. Installing OS onto GOT Section 23.3.2 Make sure that the OS is installed on the GOT. Checking OS installation on GOT Section 23.3.3 Set the communication interface.
  • Page 958 23.3.1 Installing OS onto GOT Install the standard monitor OS, communication driver and option OS onto the GOT. For the OS installation methods, refer to the following manual. GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual Check the following under the Communication •...
  • Page 959 23.3.2 Checking OS installation on GOT Check if the OS is properly installed or not on the Drive information tab of GT Designer2. For the operation on the Drive information tab, refer to the following manual. GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual The OS has been installed successfully on the GOT if the following can be confirmed: 1) Satndard monitor OS...
  • Page 960 23.3.3 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) Make the GOT communication interface settings on [Communication setting] of GT Designer2. Select the same communication driver as the one installed on the GOT for each communication interface. For details on [Communication setting] of GT Designer2, refer to the following manual. GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual Communication settings...
  • Page 961 Communication detail settings Item Description Range Set this item when change the transmission speed used for 9600bps,19200bps, 38400bps, 57600bps, Transmission Speed communication with the connected equipment. 115200bps <Default: 19200bps> Set this item when change the data length used for communi- Data Bit cation with the connected equipment.
  • Page 962 (1) Communication interface setting by Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility's "Communication setting" after downloading "Communication setting" of project data. For details on the Utility, refer to the following manual. User's Manual (2) Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer or the Utility, the latest setting is effective.
  • Page 963 23.3.4 Downloading project data Download project data to the GOT. For how to download project data, refer to the following manual. GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual Check the necessary items and click the button. Download Download 23 - 21 23.3 Preparatory Procedures for Monitoring 23.3.4 Downloading project data...
  • Page 964 23.3.5 Attaching communication unit and connecting cable Cautions when attaching the communication unit and connecting the cable Shut off all phases of the GOT power supply before attaching the communication unit and connecting the cable. Attaching the communication unit Attach the serial communication unit to the extension unit connector on the GOT.
  • Page 965 How to connect the cable (1) How to connect the RS-422 cable (a) For the GT15 •connection to the RS-232 interface Connect the RS-422 conversion unit to the RS- 232 interface on the GOT. Connect the RS-422 cable to the RS-422 conversion unit.
  • Page 966 When using the RS-422 conversion unit On "Communication settings" on the utility, make setting so that 5V DC power is supplied to the RS-422 conversion unit from the RS-232 interface on the GOT. For details on the utility, refer to the following manual: User's Manual Touch [5V supply].
  • Page 967 23.3.6 Verifying GOT recognizes connected equipment Verify the GOT recognizes connected equipments on [Communication setting] of the Utility. • Channel number of communication interface, communication drivers allocation status • Communication unit installation status Remark How to display Utility(at default), utility call key 1-point press on GOT screen upper-left corner When using GT1595-X Utility display...
  • Page 968 After powering up the GOT, touch [Main Menu] [Communication setting] from the Utility. The [Communication setting] appears. Verify that the following communication driver name is displayed in the box for the communication interface to be used. • Communication driver: FREQROL 500/ When the communication driver name is not displayed normally, carry out the following procedure again.
  • Page 969 23.3.7 Checking for normal monitoring Check for errors occurring on the GOT. Presetting the system alarm to project data allows you to identify errors occurred on the GOT, PLC CPU, servo amplifier and communications. For details on the system alarm, refer to the following manual. User’s Manual (When using GT15) Communication...
  • Page 970 Perform an I/O check Whether the inverter can communicate with the GOT or not can be checked by the I/O check function. If this check ends successfully, it means correct communication interface settings and proper cable connection. Display the I/O check screen by [Main Menu] [Debug &...
  • Page 971 23.4 FREQROL Series Inverter Side Settings Inverter For details of the inverter, refer to the manual of each series. Model name S500 series (including RS485 communication function) E500 series FREQROL series A500/700 series F500/700 series Communication settings (1) Make the communication settings of the inverter. Setting item Settings Inverter station No.
  • Page 972 Station No. settings Set each station number while making sure that one station number is used only once. The station number can be set without regard to the cable connection order. No problem is expected even if station numbers are not consecutive. Station No.3 Station No.0 Station No.1...
  • Page 973 23.5 Precautions Precautions of connection to the inverter (1) Make sure to establish inverter system with No.0 station. (2) Up to 10 inverters can be connected. (3) Do not make any change for each communication parameter of the inverter side from GOT. If changed, the communication to the inverter cannot be made.
  • Page 974 23.6 List of Functions Added by Version Upgrade The following describes the function added by version upgrade of GT Designer2 or OS. For using the function below, use the GT Designer2 or OS of the stated version or later. Version of GT Item Description Version of OS...
  • Page 975 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 24.1 System Configuration ..page 24-2 This section describes devices and cables needed for servo amplifier connection. Refer to this section to select the desired system. 24.2 Connection Cable ... . page 24-9 This section describes the specifications of the cables needed for servo amplifier connection.
  • Page 976 24.1.1 Connecting to the MELSERVO-J2-Super series Communication driver MELSERVO-J3, J2S/M System configuration and connection conditions Connection conditions System Configuration Number of Distance GOTs MITSUBISHI RS-232 cable 15m or less C HARGE MAX15m MITSUBISHI MITSUBISHI MITSUBISHI RS-422 cable 30m or less...
  • Page 977 System equipment (1) GOT Image Name Model name RS-232 RS-232 interface (Built into GOT) • For RS-232 communication RS-232 RS-232 RS-232 Communication Unit GT15-RS2-9P • For RS-232 communication RS-232 RS-422 conversion unit GT15-RS2T4-9P • For RS-422 communication RS-422/485 RS-422/485 RS-422/485 Communication Unit GT15-RS4-9S •...

  • Page 978: Connecting To The Melservo-J2M Series

    24.1.2 Connecting to the MELSERVO-J2M series Communication driver MELSERVO-J3, J2S/M System configuration and connection conditions Connection conditions System Configuration Number of Distance GOTs RS-232 cable 15m or less MAX15m MIT SUBISHI RS-422 cable 30m or less CH ARG E MAX30m Connect the connector of servo amplifier to CN3.
  • Page 979 System equipment (1) GOT Image Name Model name RS-232 RS-232 interface (Built into GOT) • For RS-232 communication RS-232 RS-232 RS-232 Communication Unit GT15-RS2-9P • For RS-232 communication RS-232 RS-422 conversion unit GT15-RS2T4-9P • For RS-422 communication RS-422/485 RS-422/485 RS-422/485 Communication Unit GT15-RS4-9S •...

  • Page 980: Connecting To The Melservo-J3 Series

    24.1.3 Connecting to the MELSERVO-J3 Series Communication driver MELSERVO-J3, J2S/M System configuration and connection conditions Connection conditions System Configuration Number of Distance Communication GOTs RS-422/232 conversion cable RS-232/422 RS-232 RS-422 cable 2) RS-422/232 converter RS-232 cable 2) RS-422 RS-422 cable 3) RS-422 30m or less MAX30m...
  • Page 981 BMJ-8 (Recommended) is a product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED. For detail of this product, contact MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED. is a product manufactured by HACHIKO ELECTRIC CO.,LTD. For detail of this product, contact HACHIKO ELECTRIC CO.,LTD.
  • Page 982 For detail of this product, contact Diatrend Corporation are products manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED. For detail of these products, contact MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED. 24 - 8 24.1 System Configuration 24.1.3 Connecting to the MELSERVO-J3 Series...
  • Page 983 24.2 Connection Cable The RS-232 cable or RS-422 cable used for connecting the GOT to the servo amplifier should be prepared by the user. The following provides connection diagrams for each cable, connector specifications and other information. connection cable Series and model names RS-232 cable RS-422 cable (Refer to section 24.21)
  • Page 984 Connector specifications (1) GOT side connector Use the following as the RS-232 interface and RS-232 communication unit connector on the GOT. For the GOT side of the RS-232 cable, use a connector or connector cover applicable to the GOT connector. (a) Connector type 9-pin D-sub (male) inch screw fixed type (b) Connector model...
  • Page 985 24.2.2 RS-422 cable The following shows the connection diagrams and connector specifications of the RS-422 cable used for connecting the GOT to a servo amplifier. Connection diagram (1) RS-422 cable 1) Connector for Connector for Connector for interface unit's interface unit's interface unit's 1st axis servo 2nd axis servo...
  • Page 986 (3) RS-422 cable 4) Servo amplifier side or distributor side Distributor side (Modular connector) (Modular connector) cable connection Signal Signal Pin No. Pin layout*1 Pin layout name wiring name PJ-45 plug(male) PJ-45 plug(male) *1 The pin layout shows the engagement face. (4) RS-422 cable 5) Servo amplifier side or distributor side Distributor side...
  • Page 987 Connector specifications (1) GOT side connector Use the following as the RS-422 interface and RS-422/485 communication unit connector on the GOT. For the GOT side of the RS-422 cable, use a connector and connector cover applicable to the GOT connector. (a) Connector type 9-pin D-sub (female) (b) Connector model...
  • Page 988 24.3 Preparatory Procedures for Monitoring The following shows the procedures to be taken before monitoring and corresponding reference sections. Section 24.3.1 Install the OS onto the GOT. Installing OS onto GOT Section 24.3.2 Make sure that the OS is installed on the GOT. Checking OS installation on GOT Section 24.3.3 Set the communication interface.
  • Page 989 24.3.1 Installing OS onto GOT Install the standard monitor OS, communication driver and option OS onto the GOT. For the OS installation methods, refer to the following manual. GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual Check the following under the Communication driver. •...
  • Page 990 24.3.2 Checking OS installation on GOT Check if the OS is properly installed or not on the Drive information tab of GT Designer2. For the operation on the Drive information tab, refer to the following manual. GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual The OS has been installed successfully on the GOT if the following can be confirmed: 1) Standard driver...
  • Page 991 24.3.3 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) Make the GOT communication interface settings on [Communication setting] of GT Designer2. Select the same communication driver as the one installed on the GOT for each communication interface. For details on [Communication setting] of GT Designer2, refer to the following manual. GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual Communication settings...
  • Page 992 Communication detail settings Item Description Range Set this item when change the transmission speed used for 9600bps, 19200bps, Transmission speed communication with the connected equipment. 38400bps, 57600bps <Default: 9600bps> 115200bps Specify whether to use the station No. during communication. Station No. Selection If [Yes] is selected, the station No.
  • Page 993 24.3.4 Downloading project data Download project data to the GOT. For how to download project data, refer to the following manual. GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual Check the necessary items and click the button. Download Download 24 - 19 24.3 Preparatory Procedures for Monitoring 24.3.4 Downloading project data...
  • Page 994 24.3.5 Attaching communication unit and connecting cable Cautions when attaching the communication unit and connecting the cable Shut off all phases of the GOT power supply before attaching the communication unit and connecting the cable. Attaching the communication unit Attach the serial communication unit to the extension unit connector on the GOT.
  • Page 995 How to connect the cable (1) How to connect the RS-232 cable (a) For the GT15 • connection to the RS-232 interface Connect the RS-232 cable to the RS-232 interface on the GOT. • connection to the RS-232 communication unit Connect the RS-232 cable to the RS-232 communication unit on the GOT.
  • Page 996 (2) How to connect the RS-422 cable (a) For the GT15 • connection to the RS-232 interface Connect the RS-422 conversion unit to the RS- 232 interface on the GOT. Connect the RS-422 cable to the RS-422 conversion unit. • connection to the RS-422/485 communication unit Connect the RS-232 cable to the RS-232 communication unit on the GOT.
  • Page 997 When using the RS-422 conversion unit On "Communication settings" on the utility, make setting so that 5V DC power is supplied to the RS-422 conversion unit from the RS-232 interface on the GOT. For details on the utility, refer to the following manual: User's Manual Touch [5V supply].
  • Page 998 24.3.6 Verifying GOT recognizes connected equipment Verify the GOT recognizes connected equipments on [Communication setting] of the Utility. • Channel number of communication interface, communication drivers allocation status • Communication unit installation status Remark How to display Utility(at default), utility call key 1-point press on GOT screen upper-left corner When using GT1595-X Utility display...
  • Page 999 After powering up the GOT, touch [Main Menu] [Communication setting] from the Utility. The [Communication setting] appears. Verify that the following communication driver name is displayed in the box for the communication interface to be used. • Communication driver :MELSERVO- J3, J2S/M When the communication driver name is not displayed normally, carry out the...
  • Page 1000 24.3.7 Checking for normal monitoring Check for errors occurring on the GOT. Presetting the system alarm to project data allows you to identify errors occurred on the GOT, PLC CPU, servo amplifier and communications. For details on the system alarm, refer to the following manual. User’s Manual (When using GT15) Communication...
  • Page 1001 Perform an I/O check Whether the servo amplifier can communicate with the GOT or not can be checked by the I/O check function. If this check ends successfully, it means correct communication interface settings and proper cable connection. Display the I/O check screen by [Main Menu] [Debug &...

  • Page 1002: Station No. Settings

    24.4 Setting on Servo Amplifier Side Model name Refer to MELSERVO-J2-Super series Section 24.4.1 MELSERVO-J2M series Section 24.4.2 24.4.1 Connecting to the MELSERVO-J2-Super series MELSERVO-J2-Super series For details of the MELSERVO-J2-Super series, refer to the following manual. See the technical manual for the MELSERVO-J2-Super series servo amplifiers.
  • Page 1003 (1) Parameter setting Set the parameter at the pushbutton switch provided on the operation section of the servo amplifier or setup software. Pushbutton switch provided on the operation section of the servo amplifier MODE DOWN (2) When changing the parameter Turn off then on the servo amplifier to be effective the new parameter.

Table of Contents